Acts 2:17 — Word Study

Greek	English	Parsing
καὶ	And	Conjunction
ἔσται	it will be	Verb, future, middle deponent
ἐν	in	Preposition
ταῖς	the	Article, dative, plural
ἐσχάταις	last	Adjective, dative, plural
ἡμέραις,	days,	Noun, dative, plural
λέγει	says	Verb, present, active
ὁ	<the>	Article, nominative, singular
θεός,	God,	Noun, nominative, singular
ἐκχεῶ	I will pour out	Verb, future, active
ἀπὸ	of	Preposition
τοῦ	the	Article, genitive, singular
πνεύματός	Spirit	Noun, genitive, singular
μου	of Mine	Personal pronoun, first person, genitive
ἐπὶ	upon	Preposition
πᾶσαν	all	Adjective, accusative, singular
σάρκα	flesh	Noun, accusative, singular
καὶ	and	Conjunction
προφητεύσουσιν	will prophesy	Verb, future, active
οἱ	the	Article, nominative, plural
υἱοὶ	sons	Noun, nominative, plural
ὑμῶν	of you	Personal pronoun, second person, genitive
καὶ	and	Conjunction
αἱ	the	Article, nominative, plural
θυγατέρες	daughters	Noun, nominative, plural
ὑμῶν,	of you,	Personal pronoun, second person, genitive
καὶ	and	Conjunction
οἱ	the	Article, nominative, plural
νεανίσκοι	young men	Noun, nominative, plural
ὑμῶν	of you	Personal pronoun, second person, genitive
ὁράσεις	visions	Noun, accusative, plural
ὄψονται	will behold	Verb, future, middle deponent
καὶ	and	Conjunction
οἱ	the	Article, nominative, plural
πρεσβύτεροι	elders	Adjective, nominative, plural
ὑμῶν	of you	Personal pronoun, second person, genitive
ἐνυπνίοις	dreams	Noun, accusative, plural
ἐνυπνιασθήσονται.	will dream.	Verb, future, passive

	Reference	Text (BSB)
1	Genesis 49:1	Then Jacob called for his sons and said, “Gather around so that I can tell you what will happen to you in the days to come:
2	Isaiah 2:2	In the last days the mountain of the house of the LORD will be established as the chief of the mountains; it will be raised above the hills, and all nations will stream to it.
3	Daniel 10:14	Now I have come to explain to you what will happen to your people in the latter days, for the vision concerns those days.”
4	Hosea 3:5	Afterward, the people of Israel will return and seek the LORD their God and David their king. They will come trembling to the LORD and to His goodness in the last days.
5	Micah 4:1	In the last days the mountain of the house of the LORD will be established as the chief of the mountains; it will be raised above the hills, and the peoples will stream to it.

Word	Editions carrying it	Missing from
ἐνυπνίοις dreams	NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg	TR, Byz

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίAnd8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἔσταιeimi it will be G1510 Verb · future · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular ¶

2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.

Tyndale gloss

to be

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-FDI-3S — Verb · future · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
future middle deponent indicative — an action still to come.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FDI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

See TESTAMENT.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ THE MENTAL FACULTY

Freedom of, recognized by God Ge 4:6-10; De 5:29; 1Ki 20:42; Isa 1:18-20; 43:26; Jer 36:3,7; Joh 7:17

See BLESSINGS, CONTINGENT UPON OBEDIENCE

See CHOICE

See CONTINGENCY

→ OF GOD, THE SUPREME RULE OF DUTY Mt 6:10; 12:50; 26:39,42; Mr 3:35; 14:36; Lu 11:2; 22:42; Joh 4:34; 5:30; 6:38-40; Ac…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

26%is

is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς

οὗτος

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god

ἐγώ

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά

σύ

ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

εἰμίit will be2457×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegγάρfor

ἐν

ὁArticle theσύαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t

ἐγώ

εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, deserving×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἐνen in G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνin2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ταῖςho the G3588 Article · dative · plural · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-DPF — Article · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἐσχάταιςeschatos last G2078 Adjective · dative · plural · feminine ¶

53× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means 'last' or 'farthest' and is used to describe something that is final or extreme. It appears in Matthew 20:12 and Acts 1:8, describing the last or utmost things.

Amplified meaning

final

Tyndale gloss

last/least

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔσχατος (i.e., *eschatos*) means 'last' or 'utmost.' It can refer to the final position in space or time, as well as the lowest rank or degree. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts discussing the end times and the last days, such as in Matthew 12:45 and 1 Peter 1:20. The lexicons generally agree on its meanings and applications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔσχατος, -η, -ον

[in LXX chiefly for אַחֲרִית אַחֲרוֹן ;]

last, utmost, extreme;

of place: of the lowest or least honoured place, Lk 14:9, 10; τ. ἔσχατον, c. gen. part., Ac 1:8 13:47;

of time: Mt 20:12, 14, Mk 12:6, 22, opp. to πρῶτος, Mt 20:8, I Co 15:45, Re 2:19, al.; τὰ ἔ. καὶ τ. πρῶτα, Mt 12:45, Lk 11:26, II Pe 2:20…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔσχατος, -7, -ov, (ἔτ. ἔχω, ἔσχον adhering, clinging close; [ace. to al. (Curtius § 583 b.) superl. fr. ἐξ, the outermost]), Sept. for }i7N8, MINN; [fr. Hom. down]; eztreme, last in time or in place; 1. joined to nouns:

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔσχατος. For ἔ. with reference to ¢ime cf. P Oxy II. 280% (a.p. 88-9) ἐν δὲ τῷ ἐσχάτῳ ἐνιαυτῷ, P Tebt IT. 375° (A.D. 140) τῷ δὲ πέμπτο (1. τῷ) ἔτι (1. ἔτει) ὅ ἐστιν ἔσχατον eros τῆς μισθώσεως. See also BGU IV. ro24iv-8 (iv/y A.D.) τῆς ἐσχάτης ἐλπίδας (/-—os) ἀποστε[ρ]ῆσαι, and from the inscrr. Michel 326? (ii/B.C.) τῆς ἐσχάτης τοῦ βίου τε[λ]ευτῆς. With τὰ ἔσχατα in Mt 1245 a/., cf. P Vat At (B.c. 168) (= Witkowski, p. 65) τοῦ παιδίου cov els τὰ ἔσχατα ἐληλυθότος. AZiche/ 39434 (mid. 1.8.6.) τῆς πόλ[ε]ως ἐν τοῖς ἐσχάτοις ὑπαρχούσης κινδύνοις supports Hort’s rendering of ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ in I Pet 1° ‘in a season of extremity,” ‘““when things are at their worst,’’ for which he adduces various classical exx. For the adverbial ἔσχατον, as in 1 Cor 158, see P Oxy VI. 88674 (iii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 112) τὸ δὲ ὑπολιπό[μ]εννον ἔσχατον ἀνάγνωτι (/.—6), Syil 879" (end of iii/B.c.) ἐπιτελεῖν δὲ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔσχατος (eschatos) — last/least.

ἔσχᾰτος, η, ον,

also ος, ον [Refs 4th c.BC+(probably from ἐκ, ἐξ, perhaps eĝhzκατος (compare ἐχθός) like{ἔγ-κατα}):

I. of Space, as always in [Refs 8th c.BC+], farthest, uttermost, extreme, θάλαμος ἔ. the hindmost chamber, [Refs 8th c.BC+]at the end of the lines, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔσχατοι ἀνδρῶν, of the Aethiopians, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τάξις ἐ. the farthest part of the army, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐξ ἐσχάτων ἐς ἔσχατα ἀπικέσθαι from end to end, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—in various senses, uppermost, ἐ. πυρά [Refs 5th c.BC+]; lowest, deepest, ἀΐδας [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; innermost, σάρκες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; last, hindmost, ἤλαυνε δ᾽ ἔ. [Refs]; ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτῳ at the close of a document, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔσχατος

eschatos

a superlative probably from 2192 (in the sense of contiguity);

farthest, final (of place or time):--ends of, last, latter end,

lowest, uttermost.

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔσχατος, η, ον

Adj

last, at the last, finally

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔσχατος eschatos 52x

farthest; last, latest, Mt. 12:45; Mk. 12:6; lowest, Mt. 19:30; 20:16; in the lowest plight, 1 Cor. 4:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔσχατος ἔσχα^τος, η, ον prob. from ἐκ, ἐξ, as if ἔξατος, outermost

of Space, as always in Hom. the furthest, uttermost, extreme, id. Hom., Hdt., attic; ἔσχατοι ἄλλων, of the Thracians who were the last in the Trojan lines, Il.; ἔσχατοι ἀνδρῶν, of the Aethiopians, Od.: ἔσχατα, τά, extremities, ἐσχ. γαίης Hes.; τὰ ἔσχ. τοῦ στρατοπέδου Thuc.

the furthest in each direction.

the uppermost, Soph.

lowest, deepest, Lat. imus, ἀΐδας Theocr.

innermost, Lat. intimus, Soph.

the last, hindmost, id. Soph.

of Degree, the uttermost, utmost, last, worst, πόνος, κίνδυνος Plat.:—as Subst., τὸ ἔσχατον, τὰ ἔσχατα, the utmost, Hdt.; of suffering, pain, etc., id. Hdt., attic; ἐπ᾽ ἔσχατα βαίνεις Soph.; ἔσχατ᾽ ἐσχάτων κακά worst of possible evils, id. Soph.; so in Sup., τὰ πάντων ἐσχατώτατα the extremest of all…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adj-DPF-S — Adjective · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DPF-S Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine Degree: Superlative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

94%last

last94% · 51×uttermost part4% · 2×other renderings2% · 1×

54 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial43%subject25%predicate21%object9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 53 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνκαίand, even, also,γίνομαιI come into bein

ἐπί

δέbut, on the otheἔρχομαιI come, goσύ

πρῶτοςfirst, before

εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁράωI see, look uponὅς

ἕωςuntil, as far as

καίand, even, also,σωτηρίαdeliverance, sal

ἔσχατοςlast53×

what comes after →

ἡμέραa day

ὁArticle theλέγωI say, speakἐνίστημιI place in or up

ὁArticle the

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thγῆthe earth, soil,ἡμέραa day

καίand, even, also, nam

ἔσχατοςlast, at the lasπᾶςall, the whole, ὁArticle the

πρῶτοςfirst, before

καίand, even, also,

ὅς

εἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔσχατος · 53× in the New Testament

Matthew John Luke Revelation 1 Corinthians Mark Acts 1 John 1 Peter 2 Peter 2 Timothy Hebrews

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πρῶτοςfirst, before×ἡμέραa day×ἕωςuntil, as far as×ἔσχατοςlast, at the last, finally×ὥραan hour, season×ἀποδίδωμιI give back, return, sell×χείρωνworse×τόποςa place×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַחֲרִיתafter-part, end30%H319 · 25 verses אַחֲרוֹןf. אַחֲרוֹנָה, pl. אַחֲרֹנִים (also אַחֲרוֹנִים), co25%H314 · 21 verses רִאשׁוֹןformer, first, chief18%H7223 · 15 verses

Counted over the 82 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 88c. AD 40

οἱ δ’ αὖ κυβερνῆται πρὸς τὸ τῆς νεὼς ἔσχατον χωρίον πρύμναν παρελθόντες πάντων ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν εἰσιν ἄριστοι τῶν ἐμπλεόντων, ἅτε τῆς νεὼς καὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτῇ τὴν σωτηρίαν ἐν χερσὶ ταῖς αὑτῶν ἔχοντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.1c. AD 75–95

Παραδόξου δὲ τῆς σωτηρίας τοῖς Ἑβραίοις οὕτως γενομένης δεινῶς ἐλύπει πάλιν αὐτοὺς ἀγομένους ἐπὶ τὸ Σιναῖον ὄρος ἡ χώρα τελέως οὖσα ἔρημος καὶ τῶν τε πρὸς τροφὴν αὐτοῖς ἄπορος, σπανίζουσα δὲ καὶ ὕδατος εἰς τὸ ἔσχατον, καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀνθρώποις τι…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.9c. AD 100

διὸ προσέχωμεν ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις: οὐδὲν γὰρ ὠφελήσει ἡμᾶς ὁ πᾶς χρόνος τῆς πίστεως ἡμῶν, ἐὰν μὴ νῦν ἐν τῷ ἀνόμῳ καιρῷ καὶ τοῖς μέλλουσιν σκανδάλοις, ὡς πρέπει υἱοῖς θεοῦ, ἀντιστῶμεν, ἵνα μὴ σχῇ παρείσδυσιν ὁ μέλας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. BC 2nd c. BC

P.Mert. 1 10Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 21

ὁ μεμισθωμένος σπερμάτων κριθῆς ἀρτάβαις τρισὶ κριθῆς ἀρταβῶν τριάκοντα τὸ δὲ τρίτον ὅ ἐστιν ἔσχατον ἔτος τῆς μισθώσεως εἰς σπορὰν χόρτου εἰς κατάβρωμα καὶ κοιτασμὸν προβάτων ἀσπερμὶ πυροῦ ἀρταβῶν

P.Athen.. 14Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 22

πυροῦ ἀρταβῶν πεντήκοντα τριῶν τὸ δὲ δεύτερον ἔτος πυροῦ ἀρταβῶν τεσσαράκοντα τριῶν τὸ δὲ ἔσχατον ἔτος πυροῦ ἀρταβῶν εἴκοσι πέντε , πάσας δὲ μέτρῳ τετάρτῳ ἐκ πόρων καὶ θαλλοῦ

P.IFAO 1 1Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 27

ἔτη τρία ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτου ἔτους Τιβερίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ, τοῦ μὲν πρώτου καὶ ἐσχάτου ἔτους εἰς πυροῦ σπορὰν ἐκφορίου τοῦ παντὸς καθʼ ἔτος σὺν σπέρμασι αἷς λήμψεται ὁ

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἡμέραις,hēmera days, G2250 Noun · dative · plural · feminine ¶

389× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for day refers to a 24-hour period, used in Revelation 21:25 and Acts 9:24. It can also mean a period of time, like in Luke 21:37.

Tyndale gloss

day

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἡμέρα is a feminine noun meaning 'day,' covering various usages from the natural day (sunrise to sunset) to a full 24-hour period. It appears in contexts contrasting day with night, as well as in metaphorical senses related to time and judgment. The New Testament references include specific phrases like 'by day' and 'every day,' with notable occurrences in Matthew and Revelation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם;]

day;

as distinct from night: gen. ἡμέρας, by day (WM, §30, 11), Re 21:25; ἡ. κ. νυκτός (ν. κ. ἡ.), Ac 9:24, I Th 2:9, II Th 3:8, Re 4:8 (Bl., §36, 13); ἡμέρας μέσης, at mid-day, Ac 26:13; acc. durat., τ. ἡμέρας, Lk 21:37; ὅλην τὴν ἡ., Ro 8:36; ἐν ἡμέρᾳ, Jo 11:9, Ro 13:13; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, (fr. ἥμερος, -ον, prop. ἡμέρα ὥρα the mild time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq.; Vanitek p. 9487); Hebr. ny; day; used 1. of the natural day, or the interval between sunrise and sunset, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night; a. prop. ἡμέρας, by day, in the daytime, [ef. collog. Eng. of a day; W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Rev. xxi. 25; ἡμέpas k. νυκτός, day and night [ef. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob. Paralip. p. 62 sq.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v.5; Lk. xvili. 7; Actsix. 24; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 9; iii.10; [2 Th. iii.8 L txt. T Tr WH]; 1 Tim. v.5; 2 Tim.i.3; Rev. iv. 8; vii. 15; xii. 10; xiv. 11; xx.10; ἡμέρας μέσης, at midday, Acts xxvi. 13; νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν [ W. 230 (216); B.§ 131, 11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts xx. 31; 2 Th.iii.8 RG; hyperbolically i. q. without intermission, λατρεύειν, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xxvi. 7; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day’s journey, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxxi.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἡμέρα. P Par 133} (8.6. 117) ἡμέρας, “during the day,” 7d. 275} (B.C. 160) τῆς ἡμέρας, ‘‘every day,” 23. 497° (B.c. 164-158) τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην ἀσχοληθείς, P Tebt I. 17° (B.c. 114) ἅμ᾽ ἡμέραι, ‘‘at daybreak,” P Giss I. 1710 (time of Hadrian) καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, P Oxy VII. 10296 (A.D. 107) els τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν, 74. τοῦ814 (iii/A.D.) ἡμερῶν ἀνοχὴν ἔχω, 26. X. 127513 (iii/A.D.) ἐφ᾽ ἡμέρας ἑορτῶν πέντε. In P Giss I. 197 (ii/A.D.) a wile writes to her husband—ovv]exas ἀγρυπνοῦσα γυκτὸς ἡϊμέρας μ]ήίαν μέριμναν ἔχω τὴν περὶ [τῆς σωτ]ηρίας σου. The noun is used of ¢ime generally, as in Jn 14°°, Ac 933 a/., in P Amh II. 304° (ii/B.c.) where a woman, who has been ordered to vacate a house, asks ‘‘ for time’”’—‘pépas αἰτοῦσα, promising that she will quit—ev ἡ[μ]έραις 4, “ within ten days.’ For the parenthetic nominative of time, as Mt 1532, Mk 85, Lk 928, we may perhaps cite P Lond 417} (c. A.D. 346)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἡμέρα (hēmera) — day.

ἡμέρα,

Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἡμέρη [Refs], Doric dialect ἀμέρα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Locrian dialect ἀμάρα [Refs] (aspirated perhaps only in Attic dialect and West Ionic dialect, compare ἐπάμερος [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; usually unaspirated in early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs]; aspirated in codices even in dialects: original ἀμέρα probably took aspirate from ἑσπέρα): ἡ:—day, less frequently than ἦμαρ in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τίς νύ μοι ἡ. ἥδ; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μῆνές τε καὶ ἡ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἡ σήμερον ἡ., see at {σήμερον· ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ} or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ at daybreak, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ. διέλαμψεν, ἐξέλαμψεν, ὑπέφαινε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ἡ. ὀψέ late in the day, [Refs]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἡμέρα

hemera

feminine (with 5610 implied) of a derivative of hemai (to sit; akin to

the base of 1476) meaning tame, i.e. gentle; day, i.e. (literally) the

time space between dawn and dark, or the whole 24 hours (but several

days were usually reckoned by the Jews as inclusive of the parts of

both extremes); figuratively, a period (always defined more or less

clearly by the context):--age, + alway, (mid-)day (by day, (-ly)), +

for ever, judgment, (day) time, while, years.

see GREEK for 5610

see GREEK for 1476

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἡμέρα, ας, ἡ

n.f.

a day

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἡμέρα hēmera 389x

day, a day, the interval from sunrise to sunset, opp. to νύξ, Mt. 4:2; 12:40; Lk. 2:44; the interval of twenty-four hours, comprehending day and night, Mt. 6:34; 15:32; from the Hebrew, ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ, day by day, every day, 2 Cor. 4:16; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, continually, 2 Pet. 2:8; καθ’ ἡμέραν, every day, daily, Acts 17:17; Heb. 3:13; a point or period of time, Lk. 19:42; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἡμέρα day, Hom., etc.:—phrases for day-break, ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ Xen.; ἡμ. διαλάμπει or ἐκλάμπει Ar.; ἡμ. ὑποφαίνεται Xen.; γίγνεται or ἐστὶ πρὸς ἡμέραν id. Xen.

with Adjs. to describe a state or time of life, ἐπίπονος ἡμ. a life of misery, Soph.; λυπρὰν ἄγειν ἡμ. Eur.; αἱ μακραὶ ἡμέραι length of days, Soph.; νέα ἡμ. youth, Eur.

poet. for time, ἡμ. κλίνει τε κἀνάγει πάλιν ἅπαντα τἀνθρώπεια Soph.

absol. usages,

in gen., τριῶν ἡμερέων within three days, Hdt.; ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων within a few days, Thuc.: —also, ἡμέρας by day, Plat.; δὶς τῆς ἡμέρης ἑκάστης twice every day, Hdt.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-DPF — Noun · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

56%day

day56% · 220×days40% · 158×other renderings4% · 14×

392 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial76%subject14%object7%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 389 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνἐκεῖνοςδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

εἰμίI am, existἐκεῖνοςαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

γίνομαιI come into beinἔρχομαιI come, goὁArticle the

κατά

ὁArticle theἐγώαὐτός

τρεῖςthree

μετάἐνδιά

ἡμέραdays,389×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

σάββατονthe Sabbath, a wκύριοςlord, Lord, mastἄζυμοςunleavened, the

ἐκεῖνος

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o

καίand, even, also, nam

νύξthe night, nightτρεῖςthreeὁArticle the

ἐν

ὁArticle theὅςἐμπαιγμόςmockery

οὗτος

πορεύομαιI travel, journeἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἡμέρα · 389× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Revelation Hebrews 2 Peter Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament23 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐκεῖνος×τρεῖςthree×νύξthe night, night-time×τρίτος& Adv×ἄχριas far as, up to, until×ἔσχατοςlast, at the last, finally×ἕωςuntil, as far as×κρίσιςjudging, divine judgment×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יוֹםday85%H3117 · 925 verses

Counted over the 1,082 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 13c. AD 40

Ἓξ δὲ ἡμέραις δημιουργηθῆναί φησι τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ προσεδεῖτο χρόνων μήκους ὁ ποιῶν — ἅμα γὰρ πάντα δρᾶν εἰκὸς θεόν, οὐ προστάττοντα μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ διανοούμενον —, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τοῖς γινομένοις ἔδει τάξεως.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.1c. AD 100

Ἡμερῶν οὖν οὐσῶν πονηρῶν καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἐνεργοῦντος ἔχοντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ὀφείλομεν ἑαυτοῖς προσέχοντες ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δικαιώματα κυρίου,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Amh. 2 50Pathyris107 BC

Πέρσαις τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως, χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα πέντε δραχμὰς δισχιλίας ἄτοκα εἰς ἡμέρας τριάκοντα ἀπὸ τοῦ Μεσορὴ τοῦ προκειμένου ἔτους. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι

P.Adl. 10Pathyris102 BC

μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὐλὴ φαλάνθῳ ἀριστερῶι χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα δέκα δύο, γίνεται τάλαντα ιβ, ἄτοκα, ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀπὸ μηνὸς Παῦνι ιθ. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ δεδανεισμένος Πανᾶς Ἀγαθίνωι

P.Adl. 19Pathyris99 BC

ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα τὰ τοῦ σιδήρου μνᾶς δισχιλίας χμ καὶ ἐπίτιμον ἡμέρας ἑκάστης ἧς ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶι τὸν σίδηρον χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς σ τῆς ἡμέρας ἑκάστης· ἡ

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

λέγειlegō says G3004 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular ¶

2,255× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means to say or speak, and it is used by Jesus and others in the New Testament to share teachings and tell stories. It appears in Matthew 9:34 and John 1:29.

Tyndale gloss

to say

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λέγω (legō) — to say.

λέγω,

__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

lego

a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate

(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and

5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech

respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980

means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,

bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),

shew, speak, tell, utter.

see GREEK for 2036

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 2980

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λέγω

v.

I say, speak

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

35%saying

saying35% · 480×says13% · 175×i say12% · 164×he says9% · 122×say5% · 70×he was saying3% · 42×they say2% · 31×other renderings17% · 225×other renderings4% · 48×

1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

αὐτός

πρόςμαθητήςa learner, disciἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theοὗτοςἐγώ

ἸησοῦςJesus

ὁArticle theδέbut, on the otheγόνυa knee

ἀμήνHebr

ἀμήνHebrαὐτόςλέγωI say, speak

λέγωsays2255×

what comes after →

αὐτός

ὁArticle theτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

ὁArticle the

μαθητήςa learner, disciἸησοῦςJesusΠέτροςPeter

σύ

ὅτιthat, since, becοὐNegἐάνCond

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theπρόςαὐτός

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theοὗτοςσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλέγω · 2,255× in the New Testament

Luke John Matthew Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians James Galatians

76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×ἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply×διδάσκαλοςa teacher×παραβολήa parable, comparison×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

כֹּהthus, here23%H3541 · 298 verses אָדוֹןlord (אֲדֹנִי, אֲדֹנַי, אֲדֹנָי are variations of Ma17%H136 · 219 verses נְאֻםutterance16%H5002 · 214 verses יהוהi.e. יַהְוֶה n. pr. dei Yahweh, the proper name of t16%H3069 · 213 verses

Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ὁho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

θεός,theos God, G2316 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

1,311× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word simply means God, referring to the one true deity. It is used throughout the New Testament, including in Matthew 27:46 and Acts 14:11, to describe the supreme being and creator of the universe.

Amplified meaning

the supreme Creator, Elohim

Tyndale gloss

God

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),

[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]

a god or deity, God.

In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.

Of the one true God;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θεός (theos) — God.

θεός, ὁ,

Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θεός

theos

of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme

Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,

God, god(-ly, -ward).

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θεός, οῦ, ὁ

n.f. & n.m.

God, a god

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θεός theos 1x

a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.

θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):

I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA

1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought

2. Definition of the Idea

3. The Knowledge of God

4. Ethnic Ideas of God

(1) Animism

(2) Fetishism

(3) Idolatry

(4) Polytheism

(5) Henotheism

(6) Pantheism

(7) Deism

(8) Semitic Monolatry

(9) Monotheism

II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

1. The Course of Its Development

2. Forms of Its Manifestation

(1) The Face or Countenance of God

(2) The Voice and Word of God

(3) The Glory of God

(4) The Angel of God

(5) The Spirit of God

(6) The Name of God

(7) Occasional Forms

3. The Names of God

(1) Generic

(2) Attributive

(3) Yahweh

4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God

(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel

(a) His Early Worship

(b) Popular Religion

(c) Polytheistic Tendencies

(i) Coordination

(ii) Assimilation

(iii) Disintegration

(d) No Hebrew Goddesses

(e) Human Sacrifices

Easton's Bible Dictionary

God

(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).

The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:

(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

96%god

god96% · 1289×other renderings3% · 34×other renderings1% · 19×

1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject31%adverbial26%object24%predicate12%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

βασιλείαkingship, sovereλόγοςa word, speech, υἱόςa son, descenden

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theπαράδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnes

ἀπό

εἰρήνηpeace, peace of ὅτιthat, since, becἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἈβραάμPropἸσαάκPropΧριστόςanointed, the Me

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐNegυἱόςa son, descendenοὗτος

θεόςGod,1311×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

δίδωμιI offer, giveπαντοκράτωρruler of the uniπατήρfather, Father,

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theπατήρfather, Father, αὐτός

ἐγώ

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςΧριστόςanointed, the Me

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,εἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθεός · 1,311× in the New Testament

Acts Romans Luke 1 Corinthians Revelation John 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 John Matthew Mark 1 Peter

15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

βασιλείαkingship, sovereignty, authority, rule, king×χάριςgrace, favor, kindness×δοξάζωI glorify, honor, bestow glory on×ἐνώπιονbefore the face of, in the presence of×θέλημαwill, wish, desire×εὐχαριστέωI thank, give thanks×ναόςa temple, shrine×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אֱלֹהִיםn. m. pl67%H430 · 1108 verses

Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἐκχεῶekcheō I will pour out G1632 Verb · future · active · indicative · first person · singular ¶

27× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To pour something out is what this word means. It's used in Revelation 16:1-4 to describe pouring out a bowl of God's wrath. The Bible also uses it to describe shedding blood or pouring out one's heart.

Amplified meaning

liberally, abundantly

Tyndale gloss

to pour out

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκχέω (i.e., *ekcheō*) means 'to pour out' and is derived from the prefix ἐκ (out) and χέω (to pour). It covers a range of meanings, including the literal act of pouring liquids and metaphorical uses such as bestowing or giving oneself up to emotions. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like the shedding of blood (e.g., Mt 26:28) and the outpouring of the Spirit (e.g., Acts 2:17).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ-χέω also Hellenistic, ἐκχύνω (in Th.: II Ki 14:14 *), and ἐκχύννω (q.v.)

[in LXX chiefly for שָׁפַךְ ;]

to pour out: φιάλην, Re 16:1-4, 8, 10, 12, 17; κέρματα, Jo 2:15; αἷμα, Mt 23:35 (cf. MM, Exp., xii), Lk 11:50, Ac 22:20, Ro 3:15 (LXX) Re 16:6. Pass., αἷμα, Mt 26:28, Mk 14:24, Ac 22:20; οἶνος, Mt 9:17, Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκχέω. With Mt 2335 cf. Sy// 8165 (ii/B.c.) (= Deissmann Δ 4.5 Ρ. 424) ἐγχέαντας αὐτῆς τὸ ἀναίτιον αἷμα ἀδικῶς. For the subst. see P Tebt I. 86᾽ (late 11,8.6.) ἐκχύ(σεως) Ἵππωνος Bada(velov), P Lond 11778* (A.D. 113) (-- ΠῚ. p- 183) ἐκχύσεων, and for a previously unknown adj. see P Oxy IX. 122018 (iii/A.D.) πέμψις μοι τοὺς ἐκχυσιαίους ἥλους, “* you will send me the nails for emptying (?) ” (Ed.). For other compound forms cf. P Ryl II. 154** (A.D. 66) λιβὸς διῶρυξ λεγομένηι ᾿Αρχείου SV οὗ (/. Hs) ἀποχεῖεται (Z. ἀποχεῖται) 6 κλῆρ[ο]ς, ‘fon the west the dyke called that of Archias by which the holding is drained,” and 18 διῶρυξ εἰς dv (Δ ἣν) cioxetra[t] ὁ κλῆρ[ος, “‘the dyke into which the holding…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκχέω (ekcheō) — to pour out.

ἐκχέω

(laterἐκφων-χύνω [NT], etc., condemned by [Refs 2nd c.AD+]future -χέω (see. χέω): aorist 1 ἐξέχεα (also imperative ἔκχυσον [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Epic dialect aorist middle ἐκχευάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect ἐκκέχῠκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—pour out, properly of liquids, οἶνον [NT+8th c.BC+]; ἀναίτιον αἷμα [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; πηγάς [Refs 5th c.BC+]is spilt, [NT] he poured forth his arrows, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b pour away: hence, spill, a vessel, ποδάνιπτρον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν χόα Men.[same place]:—passive, to be drained, εἰς [διώρυχα] [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. of words, pour forth, utter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. pour out like water, squander, waste, ὄλβον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; spoil, τὸ πᾶν σόφισμα [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκχέω ἐκχύνω ἐκχύννω

ekcheo

ekchuno ek-khoo'-no

from 1537 and cheo (to pour); to pour forth; figuratively, to

bestow:--gush (pour) out, run greedily (out), shed (abroad, forth),

spill.

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκχέω

v.

I pour out, shed

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκχέω ekcheō 16x

also formed as ἐκχύννομαι (11x), to pour out, Rev. 16:1, 2, 3; to shed blood, Mt. 26:28; Mk. 14:24; pass. to gush out, Acts 1:18; to spill, scatter, Mt. 9:17; Jn. 2:15; met. to give largely, bestow liberally, Acts 2:17, 18, 33; 10:45; pass. to rush headlong into anything, be abandoned to, Jude 11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκχέω fut. -χεῶ aor1 ἐξέχεα epic ἔκχευα mid. ἐκχευάμην to pour out, properly of liquids, Il., Aesch., etc.: metaph., in Med., ἐκχεύατ᾽ ὀϊστούς he poured forth his arrows, Od.

of words, Aesch., etc.

to pour out like water, squander, waste, one's substance, id. Aesch., etc.

Pass., 3rd pl. plup. ἐξεκέχυντο, epic syncop. aor2 ἐξέχυ^το or ἔκχυ^το, part. ἐκχύμενος [υ^]:— to pour out, stream out or forth, properly of liquids, Hom.:—metaph. of persons, id. Hom.: —generally, to be spread out, Od.

to be poured out like water, forgotten, Theogn., Plat.

to give oneself up to joy, to be overjoyed, Ar.; ἐκχ. γελῶν to burst out laughing, Anth.

to lie languidly, id. Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-FAI-1S — Verb · future · active · indicative · first person · singular
future active indicative — an action still to come.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

37%poured out

poured out37% · 10×being poured out15% · 4×i will pour out7% · 2×has been poured out7% · 2×he poured out7% · 2×gushed out4% · 1×he has poured out4% · 1×shed4% · 1×other renderings15% · 4×

27 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

μέσοςmiddle, in the mὑπάγωI go away, deparπρῶτοςfirst, before

ὁArticle the

διαθήκηa covenant, willπροφήτηςa prophet, poet

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,πούςthe foot

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle the

οἶνοςwine

ὁArticle the

ἐκχέωI will pour out27×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

φιάληa shallow and flκέρμαa small coinαἷμαblood

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theαἷμαblood

ἀπό

ὁArticle theκαταβολήa foundation, de

ἐπί

ὁArticle theἐγώ

εἰς

ἄφεσιςdeliverance, par

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκχέω · 27× in the New Testament

Revelation Acts Luke Matthew Romans John Jude Mark Titus

Across the New Testament9 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

φιάληa shallow and flat bowl×αἷμαblood×ἀσκόςa wine-skin×πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit×πολύςmuch, many, often×ὑπέρ×προφήτηςa prophet, poet×ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sacred×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

שָׁפַךְpour out, pour78%H8210 · 69 verses דָּםblood45%H1818 · 40 verses

Counted over the 88 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 158c. AD 40

σιτοπόνων τε γὰρ καὶ ὀψαρτυτῶν κάματον ἐπιλιχνεύει καὶ τῆς ἀπὸ τῶν ἡδυσμάτων κνίσσης ἐν κύκλῳ τὴν κεφαλὴν περιάγων μεταλαμβάνειν [τῆς εἰδεχθείας] ὀρέγεται, καὶ ὁπότε πολυτελῆ τράπεζαν θεάσαιτο, καταβαλὼν αὑτὸν ὅλον ἐπὶ τὰ εὐτρεπισθέντα ἐκχεῖται,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.273c. AD 75–95

κελευσθεὶς δὲ καὶ τοῦ πλησίον ὕδατος λαβὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἐκχέαι ὁρᾷ τὴν χρόαν αἱματώδη γενομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC

P.Mich. 5 256ArsinoitesAD 29–AD 30

βορρᾶ Ψενοβάστιος κλῆρος, λιβὸς διῶρυξ διʼ οὗ ποτίζεται ὁ κλῆρος, ἀπηλιώτου διῶρυξ διʼ οὗ ἐκχεῖται ὁ κλῆρος. καὶ ἀπέχω παρὰ τοῦ Ὀρσενούφιος τὸ ἑσταμένον ἀργυρικὸν παραχωρητικὸν πᾶν κεφάλαιον καὶ

P.Mich. 5 263Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 35–AD 36

ὦσιν ἐν μιᾷ σφραγῖδι, ὧν ὧν γείτονες νότου δημοσία διῶρυξ διʼ ἧς ποτίζεται καὶ ἐκχεῖται ὁ κλῆρος, βορρᾶ χῶμα Χομηνιακῆς διώρυγος, λιβὸς τοῦ πριαμένου Πνεβτύνεως κλῆρος, ἀπηλιώτου Μαρεψήμιος τοῦ

P.Coll.Youtie 1 19Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 44

ὁ τῶν τέκνων Εὐάνδρου ἐλαιὼν ἀνὰ μέσον οὔσης τῆς διώρυγος διʼ ἧς ποτίζεται καὶ ἐκχεῖται ὁ κλῆρος, ἀπηλιώτου ὁ πρότερον … οττιου κλῆρος, νυνὶ δὲ Ἀλκίμου τοῦ Ἀλκίμου ἐλαιών,

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἀπὸapo of G575 Preposition ¶

647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.

Tyndale gloss

away from

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

82%from

from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen

ὁArticle the

τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus

ἐγώ

ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue

εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind

καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά

ἀπόof647×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

αὐτός

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec

σύ

καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,

θεόςGod, a god

πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go

ἀρχήruler, beginning

ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀρχήruler, beginning×ἕωςuntil, as far as×αἴρωI raise, lift up×ΓαλιλαίαGalilee×καταβαίνωI go down, come down×εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind×μακρόθενfrom a distance×ἄρχωI begin×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

τοῦho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

πνεύματόςpneuma Spirit G4151 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter ¶

379× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for spirit or breath refers to the vital principle or mental disposition of a person, as seen in John 3:8 and 1 Corinthians 5:5. It can also mean a superhuman spirit, like the Holy Spirit in Acts 2:2.

Amplified meaning

the divine Presence, pneuma

Tyndale gloss

spirit/breath: spirit

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πνεῦμα (i.e., *pneuma*) means 'spirit' or 'breath' and is derived from the verb πνέω (to blow). It encompasses various meanings, including air in motion, the vital principle of life, and spiritual beings such as angels and demons. In the New Testament, it frequently refers to the Holy Spirit and the human spirit, appearing in contexts that contrast it with the body or flesh.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — πνοή, πνεῦμα, ἄνεμος, θύελλα from a scan

From the words into comparison with which πνεῦμα is here brought, it will be evident that it is proposed to deal with it in its natural and earthly, not in its supernatural and heavenly, meaning. Only I will observe, that on the relations between πνοή and πνεῦμα in this its higher sense there is a discussion in Augustine, De Civ. Dei, xiii. 22; cf. De Anim. et huj. Orig. i. 14, 19. The first three words of this group, as they designate not things heavenly but things earthly, differ from one another exactly as, according to Seneca, do in the Latin ‘aér,’ ‘spiritus,’ ‘ ventus’ (Nat. Qu. v. 13) : ‘Spiritum a vento motus' separat; vehementior enim spiritus ventus est; invicem spiritus leviter fluens aer.’ Πνοή and πνεῦμα occur not seldom together, as at Isai. xlii. 5; lvii. 16; πνοή conveying the impression of a lighter, gentler, motion of the air than πνεῦμα, as ‘aura’ than ‘ventus.’…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πνεῦμα, -τος, τό,

(< πνέω),

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for רוּחַ;]

of air in motion;

wind: Jo 3:8; pl., He 1:7(LXX);

breath: π. ζωῆς, Re 11:11; π. τοῦ στόματος, fig., II Th 2:8 (cf. Ps 32 (33):6).

Of the vital principle, the spirit (Arist., Polyb., al.): Lk 8:55, Jo 19:30, Ac 7:59, al.; opp. to σάρξ, Mt 26:41, Mk 14:38, I Co 5:5, al.; to σῶμα, Ro 8:10, I Co 6:17 7:34,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πνεῦμα, -τος, τό, (πνέω), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Hebr. may, Lat. spiritus; i. 6. 1. a movement of air, (gentle) blast; a. of the wind: ἀνέμων πνεύματα, Hat. 7,16, 1; Paus. 5, 25; hence the wind itself, Jn. iii. 8; plur. Heb. i. 7, (1 K. xviii. 45; xix. 11; Job i. 19; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4, etc.; often in Grk. writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down: πνεῦμα τοῦ στόματος, 2 Th. ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 6, ef. Is. xi. 4); mv. ζωῆς, the breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. πνοὴ ζωῆς, il. 7). [πνεῦμα and πνοή seem to have been in the main coincident terms; but avon became the more poetical. Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology. Even in class. Grk. πνεῦμα became as freq. and as wide in its application as ἄνεμος. (Schmidt ch. 55, 7; Trench § lxxiii.) ] 2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by which the body 18…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πνεῦμα. This is a notable ex. of those words, whose meaning has been so deepened and enriched through Christian influences, that we cannot expect our sources to throw much light on their use in the NT. One or two points may, however, be noted. Thus for the more literal meaning of the word we may cite P Oxy VI. 9047 (v/A.D.), where a certain Flavius petitions a praeses on the ground ὡς λοιπὸν εἰς αὐτὸ τὸ τῆς σωτηρίας πνεῦμα δυστυχῖν pe, “so that at last the very breath of my life is in danger” (Edd.). In P Leid Wii 2 (ii/iii A.D.) (= II. p. 157) reference is made to a book which περιέχει γέννησιν πνεύματος, πυρὸς Kal okdTo(=ov)s, ‘contains the creation of spirit, fire and darkness.” The same document αν. 4 shows οὐ ἀντιτάξεταί μοι πᾶν πνεῦμα, οὐ δαιμόνιον, οὐ συνάτ(--άντ)ημα. Reminiscent of LXX Numb 1622, 2716, isthe Jewish ‘‘ prayer for vengeance” from Rheneia, Sy// 816 (=#1181)*, which…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πνεῦμα (pneuma) — spirit/breath: spirit.

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό,

(πνέω) blast, wind, first in [Refs 6th c.BC+]: frequently in Trag., etc., ἀνέμων πνεύματα πάντων [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θαλάσσας.. πνεύματι λάβρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] is commoner in Poets; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατὰ πρύμναν ἵσταται τὸ π.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ πνεῦμα στῆναι τοῦ ἄρρενος to leeward of him, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but κατὰ π. προσιόντες down wind, [Refs]; πνεύματος ἀνείλησις, ἐκπύρωσις, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; as an element, air, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

2. metaphorically, θαλερωτέρῳ π. with more genial breeze or influence, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; αἰδοίῳ π. χώρας with air or spirit of respect on the part of the country, [Refs]; π. ταὐτὸν οὔποτ᾽.. ἐν ἀνδράσιν φίλοις βέβηκεν the…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πνεῦμα

pneuma

from 4154; a current of air, i.e. breath (blast) or a breeze; by

analogy or figuratively, a spirit, i.e. (human) the rational soul, (by

implication) vital principle, mental disposition, etc., or

(superhuman) an angel, demon, or (divine) God, Christ's spirit, the

Holy Spirit:--ghost, life, spirit(-ual, -ually), mind. Compare 5590.

see GREEK for 4154

see GREEK for 5590

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

wind, breath, spirit

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πνεῦμα pneuma 379x

wind, air in motion, Jn. 3:8; breath, 2 Thess. 2:8; the substance spirit, Jn. 3:6; a spirit, spiritual being, Jn. 4:24; Acts 23:8, 9; Heb. 1:14; a bodiless spirit, specter, Lk. 24:37; a foul spirit, δαιμόνιον, Mt. 8:16; Lk. 10:20; spirit, as a vital principle, Jn. 6:63; 1 Cor.…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πνεῦμα πνεῦμα, ατος, τό, πνέω a blowing, πνεύματα ἀνέμων Hdt., Aesch.: alone, a wind, blast, Trag., etc.

metaph., θαλερωτέρῳ πν. with more genial breeze or influence, Aesch.; λύσσης πν. μάργῳ id. Aesch.; πν. ταὐτὸν οὔποτ᾽ ἐν ἀνδράσιν φίλοις βέβηκεν the wind is constantly changing even among friends, Soph.

like Lat. spiritus or anima, breathed air, breath, Aesch.; πν. βίου the breath of life, id. Aesch.; πν. ἀθροίζειν to collect breath, Eur.; πν. ἀφιέναι, ἀνιέναι, μεθιέναι to give up the ghost, id. Eur.; πνεύματος διαρροαί the wind-pipe, id. Eur.

that is breathed forth, odour, scent, id. Eur.

spirit, Lat. afflatus, Anth.: inspiration, NTest.

the spirit of man, id. NTest.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

spir'-it (ruach; pneuma; Latin, spiritus):

1. Primary and Figurative Senses

(1) As Wind, Breath

(2) As Anger or Fury

(3) As Mental and Moral Qualities in Man

2. Shades of Meaning

(1) As Life-Principle

(2) As Surviving Death

(3) Spiritual Manifestations

3. Human and Divine Spirit

(1) The Human as Related with the Divine

(2) Operations of the Divine Spirit as Third Person of the Trinity

4. Old Testament Applications

5. Various Interpretations

1. Primary and Figurative Senses:

(1) As Wind, Breath:

Used primarily in the Old Testament and New Testament of the wind, as in Ge 8:1; Nu 11:31; Am 4:13 ("createth the wind"); Heb 1:7 (angels, "spirits" or "winds" in margin); often used of the breath, as…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Spirit

(Heb. ruah; Gr. pneuma), properly wind or breath. In 2 Thess. 2:8 it means “breath,” and in Eccl. 8:8 the vital principle in man. It also denotes the rational, immortal soul by which man is distinguished (Acts 7:59; 1 Cor. 5:5; 6:20; 7:34), and the soul in its separate state (Heb. 12:23), and hence also an apparition (Job 4:15; Luke 24:37, 39), an angel (Heb. 1:14), and a demon (Luke 4:36; 10:20). This…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A word employed in various senses in Scripture.

1. For THE HOLY, HOLINESS SPIRIT, the third person of the Holy Trinity, who inspired the prophets, animates good men, pours his unction into our hearts, imparts to us life and comfort; and in whose name we are baptized and blessed, as well as in that of the Father and the Son. When the adjective Holy is applied to the term Spirit, we should always understand it as here explained; but there are many places whether it must be taken in this sense, although the term Holy is omitted. See HOLY, HOLINESS SPIRIT.

2. BREATH, respiration; or the principle of animal life, common to men and animal: this God has given, and this he recalls when he takes away life, Ec 3:21. See SOUL.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Called “the inner man,” Ro 7:22; Eph 3:16

→ See ANGELS

→ See DEMONS

→ See HOLY SPIRIT

→ See MAN, A SPIRIT

→ See SATAN

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

90%spirit

spirit90% · 346×spirits8% · 31×other renderings2% · 8×

385 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial39%subject29%object21%predicate7%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 379 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheτίςIrg

ἐν

βαπτίζωI dip, submerge,δέbut, on the otheἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sac

ὁArticle theγάρforσύ

αὐτός

ὁArticle theθυγάτριονa little daughteλέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also, nam

πίνωI drink, imbibeἸσραήλPropμάστιξa scourge, lash,

πνεῦμαSpirit379×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἅγιοςset apart, holy,ἀκάθαρτοςunclean, impureθεόςGod, a god

ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sac

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theἀτενίζωI direct my gaze

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theδύναμιςmight, power, maἀλήθειαtruth

ἐγώ

ἐπίἐπιτάσσωI give order, coοὗτος

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theἅγιοςset apart, holy,καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπνεῦμα · 379× in the New Testament

Acts 1 Corinthians Luke Romans John Revelation Mark Matthew Galatians 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sacred×ἀκάθαρτοςunclean, impure×δύναμιςmight, power, marvelous works×ἀλήθειαtruth×πονηρόςevil, bad, wicked×ἑπτάIndec×πίμπλημιI fill×βαπτίζωI dip, submerge, baptize×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

רוּחַbreath, wind, spirit81%H7307 · 141 verses

Counted over the 173 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.27c. AD 75–95

ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

7th c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD 5th c. AD 6th c. AD

ZPE 35 (1979), p. 140 no. 1 cHermopolisAD 602

ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας καὶ ὁμοουσίου τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος βασιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου καὶ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαυίου Φωκᾶ τοῦ αἰωνίου Αὐγούστου Αὐτοκράτορος καὶ

Tyche 20 (2005), p. 1-9HerakleopolitesAD 603

r ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος καὶ τῆς δεσποίνης ἡμῶν τῆς θεοτόκου καὶ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων, βασιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου καὶ

SB 1 4740ArsinoitesAD 602–AD 610

ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας καὶ ὁμοουσίου τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος καὶ τῆς δεσποίνης

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

μουegō of Mine G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular ¶

1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

In plain English

Tyndale gloss

I/we

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-1GS — Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Mine

The process of mining is described in Job 28:1-11. Moses speaks of the mineral wealth of Palestine (Deut. 8:9). Job 28:4 is rightly thus rendered in the Revised Version, “He breaketh open a shaft away from where men sojourn; they are forgotten of the foot [that passeth by]; they hang afar from men, they swing to and fro.” These words illustrate ancient mining operations.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

35%us

us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἐπὶepi upon G1909 Preposition ¶

886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.

Tyndale gloss

upon/to/against

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

28%upon

upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright

αὐτός

δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head

κάθημαιI sit, am seated

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m

πίπτωI fall, fall under

δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

ἔρχομαιI come, go

ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,

ἐπίupon886×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theὅτιthat, since, bec

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theὅςκαίand, even, also,

σύ

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole,

ἐγώ

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

γῆthe earth, soil, land×κάθημαιI sit, am seated×πίπτωI fall, fall under×θρόνοςa throne, seat×κεφαλήthe head×θάλασσαthe sea, lake×λίθοςa stone×πρόσωπονthe face, countenance, surface×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

πᾶσανpas all G3956 Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

1,242× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means all or every, as in Matthew 3:10 and Romans 7:8, where it refers to everything or all people, emphasizing the universal nature of God's message.

Amplified meaning

every, entire

Tyndale gloss

all

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πᾶς (i.e., *pas*) means 'all' or 'every' and appears in various forms, including masculine, feminine, and neuter. It is used in the New Testament to denote totality, as in 'all things' or 'every kind,' and can function as an adjective or pronoun. Notably, it can also imply 'the whole' when used with definite articles, as seen in verses like Matthew 28:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, gen., παντός, πάσης, παντός,

[in LXX chiefly for כֹּל;]

all, every.

As adj.,

c. subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mt 3:10 4:23, Mk 9:49, Lk 4:37, Jo 2:10, Ac 27:20, Ro 7:8, Re 18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Ac 22:15, Ro 5:12, He 1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mt 28:18,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, en. παντός, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. Lchm. πᾶσι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times; Tdf. -σι five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times; Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -ox fourteen times, -ow sixty-eight times; see N, v (ἐφελκυστικόν)], Hebr. 75, [fr. Hom. down], all, every; it is used I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous nouns; a. any, every one (86. of the class denoted by the noun annexed to mas); with the Singular: as πᾶν δένδρον, Mt. iii. 10; πᾶσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13; Lk. iv. 37; Jn.ii. 10; xv.2; Acts ii.43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πᾶσα ἀνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. p- 249e.); πᾶσα συνείδησις ἀνθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas λεγόμενος θεός, 2 Th. ii. 4; πᾶς ἅγιος ἐν Χριστῷ, Phil. iv. 21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παῖς. In Gnomon 41 (¢. A.D. 150) it is laid down—éav Αἰγύπτιος ἐκ κοπρίας [ἀν]έληται παῖδα καὶ τοῦτον υἱοποιήσηται, μετὰ θάνατον τεταρτολο[ γεῖτ]αι, ““1Γ an Egyptian shall take up a child from the dungheap, and adopt him as a son, he shall be mulcted after his death to the extent of one fourth of his property.” For παῖς applied to a female child see P Strass I. 41° (A.D. 250) ἐκδικῆσαι τὰ τῆς παιδός, and P Oxy 1 5215 (A.D. 325) εΠδαμὲν τὴν παῖδα ἔχουσαν κατὰ τῶν εἰσχίων ἀμυχὰς μετὰ πελιωμάτων (see 76. II. p. 319), ““νγῈ saw that the girl had wounds on her hips with livid spots”: cf. Lk 8° (for voc. of address see Pro/eg. pp. 70, 235). The word is commonly applied to slaves, as in Lk 77 a/., e.g. P Lille 27 (iii/B.c.), where 11 male slaves are enumerated under the heading παῖδες, then 2 female slaves, and then again 3 male slaves: cf. P Strass I. 405 (a. p. 569) Κολλοῦθος Βίκτορος…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πᾶς (pas) — all.

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν,

__AAeolic dialect παῖς, παῖσα [Refs 7th c.BC+] feminine πάνσα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Delph. πάντεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also Locrian dialect πάντεσιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντοις [Refs 2nd c.BC+] as accusative masculine in [LXX+7th c.BC+], etc. (but in compounds sometimes long in Attic dialect, [Refs].]—Coll. pronoun, when used of a number, all; when of one only, the whole; of the several persons in a number, every.

__A.I in plural, all, πάντες τε θεοὶ πᾶσαί τε θέαιναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντες ὅσοι.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντας ᾧ ἂνπεριτυγχάνῃ, for ὅσοις ἄν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the Article, see.below [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πᾶς

pas

including all the forms of declension; apparently a primary word; all,

any, every, the whole:--all (manner of, means), alway(-s), any (one),

X daily, + ever, every (one, way), as many as, + no(-thing), X

thoroughly, whatsoever, whole, whosoever.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν

Adj

all, the whole, every kind of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πᾶς pas 1x

all; in the sg. the whole, entire, usually when the substantive has the article, Mt. 6:29; 8:32; Acts 19:26; every, only with an anarthrous subst., Mt. 3:10; 4:4; pl. all, Mt. 1:17, et al. freq.; πάντα, in all respects, Acts 20:35; 1 Cor. 9:25; 10:33; 11:2; by a Hebraism, a negative with πᾶς is sometimes equivalent to οὐδείς or μηδείς, Mt. 24:22; Lk. 1:37; Acts 10:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol: Used in various combinations, and with different meanings.

(1) All along, "Weeping all along as he went" (Jer 41:6), i.e. throughout the whole way he went, feigning equal concern with the men from Shiloh, etc., for the destruction of the Temple, so as to put them off their guard.

(2) All in all, "That God may be all in all" (1Co 15:28, Greek: panta en pasin, "all things in all (persons and) things"). "The universe, with all it comprises, will wholly answer to God's will and reflect His mind" (Dummelow).

(3) All one, "It is all one" (Job 9:22), "it makes no difference whether I live or die."

(4) At all, "If thy father miss me at all" (1Sa 20:6), "in any way," "in the least."

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

62%all

all62% · 789×all things12% · 156×every12% · 150×everyone6% · 76×everything3% · 34×other renderings3% · 40×other renderings2% · 19×

1,264 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 28 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject40%adverbial30%object21%predicate5%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,242 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύλόγοςa word, speech,

ἐν

καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἐγώ

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςὅςὁArticle the

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδείκνυμιI point out, shoπροσφέρωI bring to, offe

ἐπί

καίand, even, also,ἐγώεἰμίI am, exist

πᾶςall1242×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἔθνοςa race, people, λαόςa people, the crπιστεύωI believe, have

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theχορτάζωI feed, satisfyδιά

σύ

εἰμίI am, existἐνκαίand, even, also,

γάρfor

ὁArticle theσύοὗτος

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theοὗτοςὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπᾶς · 1,242× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians Romans Mark John Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians Colossians

27 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ὑποτάσσωI place under, subject to×κατοικέωI dwell in, settle in, inhabit×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 10c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ πατὴρ ἐκγόνων καὶ δημιουργὸς τῶν δημιουργηθέντων στοχάζεται τῆς διαμονῆς καὶ ὅσα μὲν ἐπιζήμια καὶ βλαβερὰ μηχανῇ πάσῃ διωθεῖται, τὰ δὲ ὅσα ὠφέλιμα καὶ λυσιτελῆ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον ἐκπορίζειν ἐπιποθεῖ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς οἱ Νώχου ἔγγονοι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐπῴκησαν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντων πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

σάρκαsarx flesh G4561 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

147× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Flesh refers to the physical body, like the meat of an animal or the human body, as seen in 1 Corinthians 15:39 and Luke 24:39.

Tyndale gloss

flesh

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σάρξ (i.e. *sarx*) means 'flesh' and refers to the soft substance of the body, both human and animal. It encompasses physical aspects, such as the body and its desires, as well as metaphorical uses related to human nature and mortality. In the New Testament, it contrasts with the spirit and is often associated with sinful desires. Notably, the term appears in various contexts, including references to Christ's earthly life and the nature of humanity.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ

[in LXX chiefly for בָּשָׂר ;]

flesh;

as in cl. generally,

prop., of the soft substance of the animal body: I Co 15:39, II Co 12:7, Ga 6:13, al.; σ. καὶ αἷμα, I Co 5:50; σ. καὶ ὀστέα, Lk 24:39; pl., of the flesh of many or parts of the flesh of one (cl.), Re 17:16 19:18; φαγεῖν, Re, ll. c. (cf. κατεσθίειν, IV Ki 9:36, al., and βιβρώσκειν, freq. in l.); metaph., Ja 5:3; mystically, φ. (τρώγειν) τὴν σ. τοῦ υἱοῦ τ. ἀνθρώπου, Jo 6:52-56;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ, (Aeol. σύρξ ; hence it seems to be derived fr. σύρω, akin to σαίρω, ‘to draw,’ ‘to draw off,’ and to signify what can be stripped off fr. the bones [ Etym. Magn. 708, 34; “sed quis ae ” (Lob. Paralip. p: 111)]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. Ww 1. prop. flesh (the soft substance 5 the living body, which covers the bones and is permeated with blood) of both men and beasts: 1 Co. xv. 39; plur.—of the flesh of many beings, Rev. xix. 18, 21; of the parts of the flesh of one, Lk. xxiv. 39 Tdf.; Rev. xvii. 16; accordingly it is distinguished both from blood, σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα (on which expression see below, 2 a.; 3 bis; 4 fin. τς W. 191), and from bones, πνεῦμα σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει, Lk. xxiv. 39 (οὐ γὰρ ἔτι σάρκας τε καὶ ὀστέα ἶνες ἔχουσιν, Hom. Od. 11, 219). φαγεῖν Tas σάρκας τινός: prop., Rey. xvii. 16; xix. 18, (Lev. xxvi. 29; κατεσθίειν, 2 K. ix. 36, and often in Sept.; in class.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σάρξ. It lies outside our purpose to discuss the theological implications underlying the use of this important word in the NT. They are due partly to tie influence of the LXX, and partly to the language-forming power of Christianity by which old terms were ‘‘ baptized” into new conditions: see the full discussion of the term in Greek and Hebrew writings until A.p. 180 in Burton, ‘‘ Spirit, Soul, and Flesh” (Chicago, 1918), and the same writer’s ‘‘ Commentary on Galatians ’’ (in ZCC) p. 492 ff., also Lightfoot Notes, p. 88. All that can be attempted here is to cite a few exx. of the word from the inscrr. It does not seem to occur in the papyri. Thus for σάρξ Ξε κρέας see OG/S γ815 (B.c. 221-205) SiSwv . .. σάρκα πεντάμναιον ἀπίὸ τῶ Blods τῶ θυομένω τῶ Δὶ τῶ Σώϊτηρ]ι, and, for the plur., Sy// 645 (= *1047)" (c. B.C. 100) παρατιθέτω]σαν δὲ καὶ é[r]l τὴν τράπεζαν τοῦ μὲν βοὸς .. . . - καὶ]…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σάρξ (sarx) — flesh.

σάρξ,

genitive σαρκός, ἡ, Aeolic dialect σύρξ [Refs]:— flesh, [Refs 8th c.BC+] always in plural, except [Refs 8th c.BC+]; sometimes to represent the whole body, μήτε γῆ δέξαιτό μου σάρκας θανόντος [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also collectively, of the body, γέροντα τὸν νοῦν, σάρκα δ᾽ ἡβῶσαν φέρει [Refs 4th c.BC+]; σαρκὸς περιβόλαια, ἐνδυτά, [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses singular and plural in much the same manner, ταῖς σαρξὶ σάρκες προσγένωνται [Refs], etc.: portions of meat, usually in plural, σάρκας τρεῖς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; but, pieces of flesh or membrane, βήσσοντα.. ὥστε σάρκας ἐνπύους.. ἀποβάλλειν [Refs]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σάρξ

sarx

probably from the base of 4563; flesh (as stripped of the skin), i.e.

(strictly) the meat of an animal (as food), or (by extension) the body

(as opposed to the soul (or spirit), or as the symbol of what is

external, or as the means of kindred), or (by implication) human

nature (with its frailties (physically or morally) and passions), or

(specially), a human being (as such):--carnal(-ly, + -ly minded),

flesh(-ly).

see GREEK for 4563

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ

n.f.

flesh, body

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σάρξ sarx 147x

flesh, Lk. 24:39; Jn. 3:6; the human body, 2 Cor. 7:5; flesh, human nature, human frame, Jn. 1:13, 14; 1 Pet. 4:1; 1 Jn. 4:2; kindred, Rom. 11:14; lineage, Rom. 1:3; 9:3; flesh, humanity, human beings, Mt. 24:22; Lk. 3:6; Jn. 17:2; the circumstances of the body, material condition, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σάρξ σαρκός flesh, Lat. caro, Hom., etc.: in pl. the flesh or muscles of the body, ἔγκατά τε σάρκας τε καὶ ὀστέα Hom.; so in Hes., Aesch., etc.:—so sometimes in sg., the flesh, the body, γέροντα τὸν νοῦν, σάρκα δ᾽ ἡβῶσαν φέρει Aesch.

the flesh, as opp. to the spirit, NTest.; also for man's nature generally, id. NTest.; πᾶσα σάρξ all human kind, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

@basar, she'er):

1. Etymology:

Used in all senses of the word, the latter, however, most frequently in the sense of kin, family, relationship (compare sha'arah, "kins-woman," Le 18:17): Le 18:6; 25:49; Pr 11:17; Jer 51:35, and probably Ps 73:26. In all other places she'er means "flesh" = body (Pr 5:11) or = food (Ps 78:20,27; Mic 3:2,3). Tibhchah, is "(slaughtered) flesh for food," "butcher's meat" (1Sa…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Flesh

In the Old Testament denotes (1) a particular part of the body of man and animals (Gen. 2:21; 41:2; Ps. 102:5, marg.); (2) the whole body (Ps. 16:9); (3) all living things having flesh, and particularly humanity as a whole (Gen. 6:12, 13); (4) mutability and weakness (2 Chr. 32:8; comp. Isa. 31:3; Ps. 78:39). As suggesting the idea of softness it is used in the expression “heart of flesh” (Ezek. 11:19). The expression “my flesh and bone” (

Smith's Bible Dictionary

[FLOOD]

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The substance of which the bodies of men and animals are composed. In the Bible, besides the ordinary sense, Job 33:25, it denotes mankind as a race, Ge 6:12 Ps 145:21 Isa 40:5-6; and all living creatures on the earth, Ge 6:17,19. It is often used in opposition to "spirit," as we use body and soul, Job 14:22; and sometimes means the body as animated and sensitive, Mt 26:41, and the seat of bodily appetites, Pr 5:11

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

99%flesh

flesh99% · 150×other renderings1% · 1×

151 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial48%subject19%object18%predicate13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 147 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνκαίand, even, also,ἐκ

κατά

ὁArticle theἐγώγάρfor

ἐν

ζάωI liveκαίand, even, also,φανερόςapparent, clear,

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

σῴζωI save, healδικαιόωI make righteousὁράωI see, look upon

καίand, even, also, nam

αἷμαbloodβασιλεύςa king, ruler, eχιλίαρχοςa military tribu

σάρξflesh147×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

αἷμαbloodπίνωI drink, imbibeὁArticle the

ἐγώ

εἰμίI am, existἀληθήςunconcealed, truκατασκηνόωI encamp, tabern

ὁArticle the

σωτήριοςsaving, bringingυἱόςa son, descendenπάθημαsuffering, passi

αὐτός

ὁράωI see, look uponδιάδέησιςsupplication, pr

εἷςone

ὅςὥστεso that, therefo

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσάρξ · 147× in the New Testament

Romans Galatians John 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians 1 Peter Revelation Hebrews Matthew Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

κατά×σάρξflesh, body×δύο×ζάωI live×ἄλλοςother, another, different×ἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagerness for, inordinate desire, lu×αἷμαblood×ἐσθίωI eat×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

בָּשָׂרflesh82%H1320 · 88 verses

Counted over the 107 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 124c. AD 40

φησὶ δὲ καὶ Ἱπποκράτης ὁ τῆς φύσεως ἐπιγνώμων ἐν ἑβδομάδι κρατύνεσθαι καὶ τὴν πῆξιν τῆς γονῆς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπλασιν τῆς σαρκός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.120c. AD 75–95

ἀπαγγέλλεται δὲ τῷ βασιλεῖ ὑπὸ τῶν γραμματέων, ὅτι τὸ πλῆθος εἰς τὸν θεὸν ἐξαμαρτάνει θῦσαν καὶ πρὶν ἢ τὸ αἷμα καλῶς ἀποπλῦναι καὶ τὰς σάρκας ποιῆσαι καθαρὰς ἐσθίον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.1c. AD 100

Εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὑπέμεινεν ὁ κύριος παραδοῦναι τὴν σάρκα εἰς καταφθοράν, ἵνα τῇ ἀφέσει τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἁγνισθῶμεν, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ ῥαντίσματος αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. BC 8th c. AD

BIFAO 64 (1964), p. 68-Magdola (Arsinoites) Magdola232 BC

ὃ ἂν τύχοι μέρος τοῦ σώματός μου, καὶ δακοῦσα τὸν ἀριστερὸν ὦμόν μου, ἀποσπᾶι σάρκα, παρόντων Πάσιτος τοῦ Κρίτωνος καὶ Ἁρμάχιος καὶ Τοτοέους καὶ Πάσιτος καὶ τοῦ Ὥρου. ἀξιῶ

JJP 33 (2003), p. 165-169 no. 2BanganartiAD 751–AD 800

ἀπὸ Διοκλητιανοῦ … , μηνὶ Φαῶφι κγ. ὁ θεὸς τῶν πνευμάτων καὶ πάσης σαρκός, ἀνάπαυσον τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτ

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

προφητεύσουσινprophēteuō will prophesy G4395 Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · plural ¶

28× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To prophesy means to speak under inspiration from God, as seen in Matthew 7:22 and Mark 14:65. It involves telling forth God's counsels or foretelling events.

Amplified meaning

speak under divine inspiration

Tyndale gloss

to prophesy

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

προφητεύω (propheteuo) means to prophesy or foretell events, primarily conveying divine messages rather than merely predicting the future. It is derived from προφήτης and is used in the New Testament to describe speaking under divine inspiration, as seen in verses like Matthew 11:13 and Acts 19:6. The lexicons note that its primary function is to declare God's counsel, while the aspect of foretelling is considered incidental.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — προφητεύω, μαντεύομαι from a scan

Προφητεύω is a word of constant occurrence in the N. T.; μαντεύομαι occurs but once, namely at Acts xvi. 16; where, of the girl possessed with the “spirit of divination,” or “ spirit of Apollo,” it is said that she “ brought her masters much gain by soothsaying ” (μαντευομένη). Theabstinence from the use of this word on all other occasions, and the use of it on this one, is very observable, furnishing a notable example of that religious instinct wherewith the inspired writers abstain from words, whose employment would tend to break down the distinction between heathenism and revealed religion. Thus εὐδαιμονία, although from a heathen point of view a religious word, for it ascribes happiness to the favour of some deity, is yet never employed to express Christian blessedness ; nor could it fitly c2 22 SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. ὃ νι. have been thus employed, δαίμων, which supplies its…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

προφητεύω

(< προφήτης),

[in LXX chiefly for נבא ni., hith.;]

to be a προφήτης (q.v.), to prophesy: in the primary sense of telling forth the Divine counsels, Mt 7:22 26:68, Mk 14:65, Lk 1:67 22:64, Ac 19:6, I Co 11:4, 5 13:9 14:1, 3-5, 24, 31, 39, Re 11:3; with the idea of foretelling future events (an idea merely incidental, not essential; v. Lft., Notes, 83 f.), Mt 11:13, Ac 2:17, 18(LXX) 21:9; seq. περί,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

προφητεύω ; fut. προφητεύσω ; impf. mpoepnrevov (Acts xix. 6 RG) and ἐπροφήτευον (ibid. LT Tr WH; [1 K. xxii. 12]; Jer. [ii. 8]; xxiii. 21; xxv. 13); 1 aor. προεφήτευσα (RG in Mt. vii. 22; xi.13; xv.7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. 1. 67; [Jn. xi. 51; Jude 147) and ἐπροφήτευσα (which form cod. Sin. gives everywh., and T Tr WH have everywh. restored, and Lchm. also with the single exception of Jude 14; add, Sir. xlviii. 13; 1 Esdr. vi. 1; Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 9, 11, 20; xxxv. (xxviil.) 8; xxxvi. (xxix.) 31; the Alexandrian translators more com. use the forms προεφήτευον, προεφήτευσα, pf. ptcp. προπεφητευκώς, Eus. h. 6. 5, 17; pf. pass. int. προπεφητεῦσθαι, Clem. Alex. strom. p. 603; on the forms used by Justin M. see Otto’s prolegg. to his works, I. i. p. xxv. ed. 3; ef. [WH. App. Ῥ- 162; Veitch 8. v.]; W. § 12,5; [B. 35 (30sq.)]; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 268; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]); (προφήτης, 4: v-)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

προφητεύω (prophēteuō) — to prophesy.

προφητ-εύω,

Doric dialect προφᾱτ- [Refs 5th c.BC+] —in imperfect and aorist 1 the augment is sometimes placed after the preposition, προ-εφήτευον, -εφήτευσα[LXX+NT]:— to be a προφήτης or interpreter of the gods, μαντεύεο, Μοῖσα, προφατεύσω δ᾽ ἐγώ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς προφητεύει θεο; who is his interpreter? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις σοι προφητεύσει τάδε will be thy intermediary in asking this, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ μανία.. προφητεύσασα with oracular power, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, τὰ προφητευθέντα [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. expound, interpret, preach, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, [NT+4th c.AD+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

προφητεύω

propheteuo

from 4396; to foretell events, divine, speak under inspiration,

exercise the prophetic office:--prophesy.

see GREEK for 4396

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

προφητεύω

v.

I foretell, prophesy

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

προφητεύω prophēteuō 28x

to exercise the function of a προφήτης; to prophesy, to foretell the future, Mt. 11:13; to divine, Mt. 26:68; Mk. 14:65; Lk. 22:64; to prophesy, to set forth matter of divine teaching by special faculty, 1 Cor. 13:9; 14:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

προφητεύω doric προφα_τεύω fut. -εύσω aor1 ἐπροφήτευσα to be an interpreter of the gods, μαντεύεο, Μοῖσα, προφατεύσω δ᾽ ἐγώ Pind.; τίς προφητεύει θεοῦ who is his interpreter? Eur.; ὅστις σοι προφητεύσει τάδε who will give thee this oracular advice, id. Eur.

in NTest. to expound scripture, to speak and preach under the influence of the Holy Spirit.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-FAI-3P — Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · plural
future active indicative — an action still to come.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

25%prophesying

prophesying25% · 7×prophesied14% · 4×prophesy11% · 3×do prophesy11% · 3×they will prophesy7% · 2×you may prophesy7% · 2×he prophesied7% · 2×will prophesy4% · 1×other renderings14% · 4×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb93%subject4%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 28 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώἅγιοςset apart, holy,σάρξflesh, body

καλῶςwell, nobly, rightly

ὑποκριτήςa hypocrite, disαὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q

ἤDisj

προσεύχομαιI pray, pray for

ἵναin order that, so th

δέbut, on the othe

προφητεύωwill prophesy28×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle the

περί

σύ

ἐγώ

Χριστόςanointed, the Me

ἨσαΐαςIsaiah

περί

λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπροφητεύω · 28× in the New Testament

1 Corinthians Acts Matthew Luke Mark Revelation 1 Peter John Jude

Across the New Testament9 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἤDisj×λαλέωI speak, say×σός×καλῶςwell, nobly, rightly×περί×ἨσαΐαςIsaiah×πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit×προσεύχομαιI pray, pray for×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

נָבָאvb. denom. prophesy70%H5012 · 55 verses

Counted over the 78 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 114c. AD 40

τοῖς γὰρ πολεμίοις φησὶν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ μισθῷ συνταχθέντα μάντιν γενέσθαι κακὸν κακῶν, ἀρὰς μὲν ἐν ψυχῇ θέμενον χαλεπωτάτας γένει τῷ θεοφιλεῖ, εὐχὰς δὲ ἀναγκασθέντα διὰ στόματος καὶ γλώττης ὑπερφυεστάτας προφητεῦσαι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.115c. AD 75–95

ἀκούσας δὲ τὸν υἱὸν καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ τὸν ὁπλοφόρον ἀπεῖναι κελεύει τὸν ἀρχιερέα λαβόντα τὴν ἀρχιερατικὴν στολὴν προφητεύειν αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν μελλόντων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.6c. AD 100

οἱ προφῆται, ἀπ̓ αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες τὴν χάριν, εἰς αὐτὸν ἐπροφήτευσαν: αὐτὸς δέ, ἵνα καταργήσῃ τὸν θάνατον καὶ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξῃ, ὅτι ὲν σαρκὶ ἕδει αὐτὸν φανερωθῆναι, ὑπέμεινεν,

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

υἱοὶuhios sons G5207 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

376× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

In the Bible, this word means a son or child, used in passages like Matthew 10:37 and Luke 1:13. It can also refer to animals, as in a foal. The word is used to describe family relationships and is an important concept in biblical genealogy.

Amplified meaning

male children, descendants

Tyndale gloss

son

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word υἱός (i.e., *huios*) means 'son' and is used broadly to refer to biological offspring, descendants, or figuratively to denote kinship. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including titles for Jesus, such as 'Son of God' and 'Son of Man', as well as in expressions of spiritual relationships, like 'sons of God' referring to believers. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

υἱός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX very freq. and nearly always for בֵּן, Ge 4:17, al.; for בַּר, Da LXX TH 7:13, al.; etc. ;],

a son;

in the ordinary sense: Mt 10:37, Mk 9:17, Lk 1:13, al. mult.; omitted with the art. of origin (WM, § 30, 3; Bl., §35, 2), τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, Ac 13:22 (LXX); also c. gen. anarth. (cl.), Σώπατρος Πύρρου Βεροιαῖος, Ac 20:4; c. adj., προτότοκος, Lk 2:7; μονογένης, Lk 7:12; opp. to νόθος, Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

υἱός (uhios) — son.

υἱός, ὁ

(written ϝηιός in Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. [Refs 6th c.BC+] —in earlier _Attic dialect_ and other Inscrr. inflected as a ῠ-stem (like πῆχυς), _nominative_ υἱύς (written huihus)[Refs]; dative υἱεῖ: dual υἱεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+], written ηυιε in [Refs 5th c.BC+] are rejected by [Refs 2nd c.AD+], Thom.Mag.p.367 R., as not Attic dialect, though the two latter forms are used by later writers (as υἱέα [Refs 3rd c.BC+] is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is mentioned as a form that would be regular by [Refs] —Homer uses _nominative_ υἱός (very frequently); genitive υἱοῦ only in [Refs 8th c.BC+], elsewhere υἱέο; dative υἱέϊ or υἱε; accusative υἱέα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: plural, nominative υἱέες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative υἱοῖσι (ν) only [Refs 8th c.BC+], belongs solely to later Epic dialect poets, as [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (υιυις lapis); accusative υἱύν [Refs]; genitive υἱέος [Refs…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

υἱός

huios

apparently a primary word; a "son" (sometimes of animals), used very

widely of immediate, remote or figuratively, kinship:--child, foal,

son.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

υἱός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a son, descendent

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

υἱός hyios 377x

a son, Mt. 1:21, 25; 7:9; 13:55 freq.; a legitimate son, Heb. 12:8; a son artificially constituted, Acts 7:21; Heb. 11:24; a descendant, Mt. 1:1, 20; Mk. 12:35; in NT the young of an animal, Mt. 21:5; a spiritual son in respect of conversion or discipleship, 1 Pet. 5:13; from the Hebrew, a disciple, perhaps, Mt. 12:27; a son as implying connection in respect of membership, service…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

υἱός υἱός, οῦ, ὁ, etc. A son, Lat. filius, Hom., etc.; υἱὸν ποιεῖσθαί τινα to adopt him as a son, Aeschin.; υἱεῖς ἄνδρες grown up sons, Dem.:—rarely of animals, NTest.

periphr., υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, for Ἀχαιοί, Il.; cf. παῖς.

Hom. sometimes makes the 1st syll. short, as if it were ὑός.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

80%son

son80% · 307×sons19% · 71×other renderings1% · 4×

382 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject35%predicate25%object20%adverbial15%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 376 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,ὁράωI see, look upon

εἰμίI am, exist

θεόςGod, a godὅςαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theτίκτωI bear, bring foεἰCond

εἰCond

αὐτόςσεαυτοῦδιάβολοςslanderous, the

αὐτός

ὅτιthat, since, becποιέωI do, makeκαίand, even, also,

υἱόςsons376×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a godνυμφώνa bridal chamber

αὐτός

ὁArticle theἸησοῦςJesusεἰμίI am, exist

ἐγώ

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existεἷςone

καίand, even, also, nam

καλέωI call, invite, ὁArticle theὅς

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theθεόςGod, a godλέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceυἱός · 376× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Mark Hebrews 1 John Acts Galatians Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament20 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the human race×ΔαυίδProp×ἸσραήλProp×καλέωI call, invite, name×παραδίδωμιI hand over, deliver, betray×ἐλεέωI pity, have mercy on×ἀγαπητόςloved, beloved×ἸωσήφProp×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.48c. AD 40

„ἐὰν δὲ γένωνται ἀνθρώπῳ δύο γυναῖκες, μία αὐτῶν ἠγαπημένη καὶ μία αὐτῶν μισουμένη, καὶ τέκωσιν αὐτῷ καὶ γένηται υἱὸς πρωτότοκος τῆς μισουμένης, ...

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.63c. AD 75–95

Ἀνώχου δὲ Ἰαράδης υἱὸς ἦν, ἐκ δὲ τούτου Μαρουῆλος, οὗ γίνεται παῖς Μαθουσάλας, τοῦ δὲ Λάμεχος, ᾧ παῖδες ὑπῆρξαν ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ἐκ δύο γυναικῶν αὐτῷ φύντες Σελλᾶς καὶ Ἄδας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Adl. 12Pathyris102 BC

τρεῖς · γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων, τὴν δʼ ἄλλην

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

, ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων, τὴν δʼ ἄλλην

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

νότου γῆ Πατήφιος τοῦ Πεμσάϊος βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος ἧς κρατοῦσιν οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ὑμῶνsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύof you2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

αἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NPF — Article · nominative · plural · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

θυγατέρεςthugatēr daughters G2364 Noun · nominative · plural · feminine ¶

28× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A daughter is a female child or descendant, as seen in Matthew 9:18 and Luke 2:36, where Jesus interacts with daughters and uses the term to address women.

Amplified meaning

female children, heirs

Tyndale gloss

daughter

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word θυγάτηρ (thugatēr) means 'daughter' and is used in various contexts, including literal familial relationships and metaphorical references to inhabitants of a place. It appears in the New Testament to denote daughters in a direct sense (e.g., Mt 9:18) and as a term of endearment (e.g., Mt 9:22). Additionally, it can refer to female descendants or inhabitants of cities, such as 'daughters of Jerusalem' (Lk 23:28).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θυγάτηρ, -τρός, ἡ

(for use of vocat., cf. M, Pr., 71; WH, App, 158),

[in LXX for בַּת (Ge 5:4, al.), exc. Jg 21:14 B, II Ch 21:17 (אִשָּׁה);]

a daughter: Mt 9:18 10:35, 37 14:6 15:22, 28, Mk 5:35 6:22 7:26, 29, Lk 2:36 8:42, 49 12:53, Ac 2:17(LXX) 7:21 21:9, He 11:24. In NT, as in OT, not in cl.;

as a form of friendly address (cf. Ru 2:2, 22 al.):

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θυγάτηρ, gen. θυγατρός, dat. θυγατρί, acc. θυγατέρα, voc. θύγατερ, plur. θυγατέρες, acc. -€pas, ἡ, (of the same root as Gothie dauhtar, Eng. daughter, Germ. Tochter [Curtius § 318; Vaniéek p. 4157); Hebr. n3; [fr. Hom. down]; a daughter: prop., Mt. ix. 18; x. 35, 37; xv. 22; Acts vii. 21,ete. improp. a. the vocative [or nom. as voc. cf. W. § 29,2; B. 8.129 a. 5; WH. App. p. 158] in kindly address: Mt. ix. 22; Mk. v. 34 [1| Tr WH θυγάτηρ; Lk. viii. 48 [Tr WH θυγάτηρ], (see υἱός 1 ἃ. fin., τέκνον b. u.). b. in phrases modelled after the Hebr.: a. a daughter of God i. 6. acceptable to God, rejoicing in God’s peculiar care and protection: 2 Co. vi. 18 (Is. xliii. 6; Sap. ix. 7; see υἱὸς τ. θεοῦ 4, τέκνον Ὁ. y.). β. withthe name of a place, city, or region, it denotes collectively all its inhabitants and citizens (very often so,in the O. T., as 15. xxxvii. 22; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 19; Zeph.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θυγάτηρ (thugatēr) — daughter.

θῠγάτηρ [ᾰ], ἡ,

genitive θυγᾰτέρος contraction θυγατρό; dative θυγᾰτέρι, θυγατρί; accusative θυγᾰτέρα Epic dialect θύγατρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; vocative θύγᾰτερ: nominative plural θυγατέρες, Epic dialect and Lyric poetry θύγατρες [Refs 7th c.BC+]: genitive plural -τέρων [Refs 5th c.BC+] Epic dialect -τέρεσσι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; both sets of forms are found in poetry, θυγατρός, -τρί, -τράσι are used in Prose:—daughter, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θύγατρες ἵππων, of mules, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θ. ταύρων, of bees, Philo Tars. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλάστιγξ ἡ χαλκοῦ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θ. Σειληνοῦ, of the vine, [Refs 4th c.AD+]; ψήφου συμβολικῆς θ., of a λάγυνος, [Refs]; of villages dependent on a city…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θυγάτηρ

thugater

apparently a primary word (compare "daughter"); a female child, or (by

Hebraism) descendant (or inhabitant):--daughter.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θυγάτηρ, τρός, ἡ

n.f.

a daughter

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θυγάτηρ thugatēr 28x

a daughter, Mt. 9:18; 10:35, 37; in the vocative, an expression of affection and kindness, Mt. 9:22; from the Hebrew, one of the female posterity of any one, Lk. 1:5; met. a city, Mt. 21:5; Jn. 12:15; pl. female inhabitants, Lk. 23:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θυγάτηρ a daughter, Hom., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NPF — Noun · nominative · plural · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

82%daughter

daughter82% · 23×daughters18% · 5×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject46%predicate14%adverbial11%object7%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 28 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐκὅτιthat, since, becὀρχέομαιI dance

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςθυγάτηρa daughterυἱόςa son, descenden

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

θαρσέωbe of good cheer

λέγωI say, speak

ἤDisj

υἱόςa son, descenden

θυγάτηρdaughters28×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πίστιςfaith, belief, tἩρῳδιάςHerodias

σύ

ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am aὁArticle theμηκέτιNeg

αὐτός

ἀπόὁArticle the

ἐγώ

ἄρτιnow, just nowκακῶςbadly, evilly

ΣιώνProp

ὁράωI see, look upon

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθυγάτηρ · 28× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Hebrews John

Across the New Testament7 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

υἱόςa son, descendent×πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×μήτηρa mother×ἩρῳδιάςHerodias×ΣιώνProp×θυγάτηρa daughter×ΦαραώProp×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

בַּתdaughter90%H1323 · 297 verses

Counted over the 330 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.21c. AD 40

„καὶ ἀπήγαγες τὰς θυγατέρας μου ὡς αἰχμαλώτιδας·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.65c. AD 75–95

πατὴρ δὲ θυγατρὸς γενόμενος ὁ Λάμεχος Νοεμᾶς ὄνομα, ἐπεὶ τὰ θεῖα σαφῶς ἐξεπιστάμενος ἑώρα δίκην αὑτὸν ὑφέξοντα τῆς Κάιος ἀδελφοκτονίας μείζονα, τοῦτο ταῖς ἑαυτοῦ γυναιξὶν ἐποίησε φανερόν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 27Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)110 BC

msup ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ ια, ὁμολογία παραχωρήσεως Σεβτίτιος Νααμσήσει τῆι ἑαυτῆς θυγατρὶ γῆς ἀρούρης 𐅵

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι πρὸς τὴν συνγραφὴν Ταΐσεως τῆς θυγατρός σου, ἃ καὶ ἀποδώσω σοι ἕως Παχὼν λ τοῦ θ ἔτους ἄνευ κρίσεως καὶ

P.Lips. 1 7Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)108 BC

ἐπὶ Πτολεμαίου ἀγορανόμου, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος μέρους Σεννήσει τῆι τοῦ Πατοῦτος θυγατρὶ τοῦ δηλουμένου δανείου ὅ ἐστιν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς τρισχιλίας ἑξακοσίας , τὸ δὲ πᾶν χαλκοῦ

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ὑμῶν,su of you, G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύof you,2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

νεανίσκοιneaniskos young men G3495 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means a young man or youth, used in Matthew 19:20 and Mark 14:51. It can also refer to an attendant or servant, as in Acts 5:10.

Amplified meaning

youths, servants

Tyndale gloss

young man

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word νεανίσκος (i.e., *neaniskos*) means 'young man' or 'youth,' derived from a diminutive form of νεανίας. It is used in the New Testament to refer to a young man in various contexts, including attendants and soldiers. The word appears in several verses, such as Matthew 19:20 and Mark 14:51, and is noted for its usage in the Septuagint.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νεανίσκος, -ου, ὁ

(dimin. of νεανίας),

[in LXX chiefly for נַעַר, also for בָּחוּר, etc.;]

a young man, youth: Mt 19:20, 22, Mk 14:51 16:5, Lk 7:14, Ac 2:17(LXX) 23:18, 22, I Jo 2:13, 14; of an attendant (cf. Ge 14:24, al.): Ac 5:10.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νεανίσκος, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, see veavias; on the ending -ioxos, -ioxn, which has dimin. force, as ἀνθρωπίσκος, βασιλίσκος, παιδίσκη, etc., cf. Βείπι. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443), fr. Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for 33 and 13; a young man, youth: Mt. xix. 20, 22; Mk. xiv. 51°; xvi. 5; Lk. vii. 14; Acts ii. 17; [and LT Tr WH in xxiii. 18 (here WH mrg. only), 22]; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; like yy) (2 5. ii. 14; Gen. xiv. 24, ete.; ef. Germ. Bursche, Knappe i. q. Knabe, (ef. our colloquial “boys”, “lads 7) used of a young attendant or servant: so the plur. in Mk. xiv. 51 Rec.; Acts v. 10.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νεανίσκος (neaniskos) — young man.

νεᾱνισκ-ος,

Ionic dialect νεην-, ὁ, (νεάν) youth, young man, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ν. τὸ εἶδος (nisi to be read νεανικός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but in [Refs 5th c.BC+] and the eldest son of Socrates is called νεανίσκος [Refs 5th c.BC+] in later Gr., Wilcken [NT+3rd c.BC+]

2. ὁ ἐμὸς ν. my young man, i.e. servant, [NT+3rd c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

νεανίσκος

neaniskos

from the same as 3494; a youth (under forty):--young man.

see GREEK for 3494

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νεανίσκος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a young man

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νεανίσκος neaniskos 11x

a young man, youth, Mk. 14:51; 16:5; used of one in the prime of life, Mt. 19:20, 22; νεανίσκοι, soldiers, Mk. 14:51

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νεανίσκος νέος a youth, Hdt., attic

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Ex 24:3-5; 1Ki 12:6-15; 2Ch 10:8; Ps 119:9; 148:12,13; Pr 1:1-33; 2:1-22; 3:1-35; 4:1-27; 5:1-23; 6:1-35; 7:1-27; 10:1; 13:1; 15:5,20; 17:2,25; 19:13,26,27; 20:29; 23:15-35; 24:1-34; 27:11; 28:7; 29:3; 31:1-3; Jer 22:18-21; Mt 19:16-22; Mr 10:17-22; Lu 15:11-32; 18:18-23; 1Ti 4:12;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

58%young man

young man58% · 7×young men33% · 4×young8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject55%object18%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

δέbut, on the otheαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,

σύ

γράφωI write

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

μνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,

νεανίσκοςyoung men11×

what comes after →

σύ

λέγωI say, speakὅρασιςa sight, vision,

ὅτιthat, since, because

νικάωI conquer, overcἰσχυρόςstrong, mighty,

οὗτος

πᾶςall, the whole,

ὁArticle the

λόγοςa word, speech,

τὶς

συνακολουθέωI accompany

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνεανίσκος · 11× in the New Testament

Acts 1 John Matthew Mark Luke

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

σύ×ὁράωI see, look upon, experience×ἀρχήruler, beginning×γράφωI write×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

בָּחוּרyoung man48%H970 · 23 verses נַ֫עַרusu. interpr. as a shaking, scattering H5288b נַ֫עַר36%H5288 · 17 verses בְּתוּלָהvirgin21%H1330 · 10 verses

Counted over the 47 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 105c. AD 40

„Ἐν ἀνθρώπου φύσει ἑπτά εἰσιν ὧραι, ἃς ἡλικίας καλέουσι, παιδίον, παῖς, μειράκιον, νεανίσκος, ἀνήρ, πρεσβύτης, γέρων·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.112c. AD 75–95

ἠξίουν τε τὸν πατέρα μηδὲν φοβηθέντα πέμπειν σὺν αὐτοῖς τὸν νεανίσκον.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.4.1c. AD 140

Ἀποκριθεὶς λέγω αὐτῇ: Κυρία, μεγάλως καὶ θαυμαστῶς ἔχει τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο: οἱ δὲ νεανίσκοι οἱ ἓξ οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, τίνες εἰσίν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 1st c. BC 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD

Aegyptus 54 (1974), p. 102-106 (P. Mil. Congr. XIV)Arsinoites (?)3 BC

Δ καὶ ἐν … … αι περὶ τοῦ ὄψου ὡς οὐ μὴ κολασθῆι ὁ νεανίσκος· καὶ σπεῖρον τῆι β τοῦ Ἁθὺρ διὰ σοῦ καὶ ἐγὼ δʼ αὐτὸς καταβαίνω πρὸ

P.Mil.Vogl. 2 70Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 101–AD 200

καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἔχει ἐργαλεῖα· λαβὼν δὲ τὸν σῖτον παρʼ αὐτοῦ, παράλαβε ἐκεῖνον τὸν νεανίσκον, καὶ δὸς αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τοῦ σίτου ἀρτάβας δ … … … ην Μαροῦ εἰς

P.Oxy. 51 3643OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 200

Ἐπικούρια, Θε … … … ς τὸ ὄνομα. διχόθεν … … … ν τὸν νεανίσκον, καὶ διʼ ἐκεῖνον καὶ διʼ αὐτὸν ἐπάξιον ὄντα τῆς παρʼ … μῖν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ὑμῶνsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύof you2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ὁράσειςhorasis visions G3706 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine ¶

4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means 'appearance' or 'vision', and can refer to an inspired appearance or an aspect of something, like in Revelation 4:3. It's related to the act of seeing or gazing.

Amplified meaning

inspired appearances, oracles

Tyndale gloss

appearance/vision

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅρασις (lemma: horasis) is derived from the verb ὁράω, meaning 'to see.' It encompasses the concepts of sight, appearance, and vision. The New Testament references include Acts 2:17 and Revelation 4:3, 9:17, where it is used to denote both physical sight and visionary experiences.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅρασις, -εως, ἡ

(ὁράω),

[in LXX chiefly for מַרְאֶה, חָזוֹן and cognate forms;]

in Arist. and later writers, the act of seeing, the sense of sight, and by meton., pl., the eyes.

appearance (Nu 24:4, Ez 1:5, Si 41:20, al.): Re 4:3.

= ὅραμα, a vision: Ac 2:17(LXX), Re 9:17.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅρασις (horasis) — appearance/vision.

ὅρ-ᾱσις, εως, ἡ,

seeing, the act of sight, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; distinguished as the ἐνέργεια or act from ὄψις (the sense or faculty), [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but, power of sight, [Refs]

2. plural, eyes, τὰς ὁ. ἐκκόπτειν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

II. a vision, [LXX+NT]

III. appearance, ὅμοιος ὁράσει λίθῳ ἰάσπιδι [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅρασις

horasis

from 3708; the act of gazing, i.e. (externally) an aspect or

(internally) an inspired appearance:--sight, vision.

see GREEK for 3708

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅρασις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

a sight, vision, appearance

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅρασις horasis 4x

seeing, sight; appearance, aspect, a vision, Acts 2:17; Rev. 9:17; 4:3*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὅρασις ὅρα_σις, εως, from ὁράω seeing, the act of sight, Lat. visus, Arist.

a vision, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- God often made known his will by

Ps 89:19

- God especially made himself known to prophets by

Nu 12:6

- OFTEN ACCOMPANIED

. A representative of the divine person and glory

Isa 6:1

. An audible voice from heaven

Ge 15:1; 1Sa 3:4,5

. An appearance of angels

Lu 1:22,11; 24:23; Ac 10:3

. An appearance of human beings

Ac 9:12; 16:9

- Frequently difficult and perplexing to those who received

them

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

50%appearance

appearance50% · 2×visions25% · 1×vision25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial75%object25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὅμοιοςlike, similar to

κάθημαιI sit, am seatedθρόνοςa throne, seat

σύ

νεανίσκοςa young man

ὁArticle the

ἐν

ὅρασιςvisions4×

what comes after →

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

καίand, even, also,

λίθοςa stone

ἴασπιςjasper

σμαράγδινοςmade of emerald

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅρασις · 4× in the New Testament

Revelation Acts

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

κάθημαιI sit, am seated×ὅμοιοςlike, similar to×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

מַרְאֶהsight, appearance, vision29%H4758 · 19 verses חָזוֹןvision26%H2377 · 17 verses אָדָםman, mankind15%H120 · 10 verses

Counted over the 64 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 54c. AD 40

ὑπὸ γὰρ φωτὸς ἄνω παραπεμφθεῖσα ἡ ὅρασις καὶ κατιδοῦσα φύσιν ἀστέρων καὶ κίνησιν αὐτῶν ἐναρμόνιον, ἀπλανῶν τε καὶ πλανήτων εὖ διατεταγμένας περιφοράς, τῶν μὲν κατὰ ταὐτὰ καὶ ὡσαύτως περιπολούντων, τῶν δ’ ἀνομοίως τε καὶ ὑπεναντίως διτταῖς περιόδοις…

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 1.6c. AD 96

ἀμαύρωσιν οὖν περικείμενοι καὶ τοιαύτης ἀχλύος γέμοντες ἐν τῇ ὁράσει, ἀνεβλέψαμεν ἀποθέμενοι ἐκεῖνο ὃ περικείμεθα νέφος τῇ αὐτοῦ θελήσει.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.10.3c. AD 140

ὤφθη δέ μοι, ἀδελφοί, τῇ μὲν πρώτῃ ὁράσει τῇ περυσινῇ λίαν πρεσβυτέρα καὶ ἐν καθέδρᾳ καθημένη.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

1st c. AD

P.Soter. 6Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 88

δύο οὐλὴ ἀντικνημίωι δεξιῶι καὶ Ἥρων Ἀφροδισίου ὡς ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα … … νενος τῇ ὁράσει Σωτηρίχωι Λύκου ὡς ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα πέντε οὐλὴ δακτύλωι μικρῶι χειρὸς ἀριστερᾶς, ἀπέχειν παρʼ αὐτοῦ

P.Oslo 3 124Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 76–AD 100

ἀρχαίου. ἐπεὶ οὐκέτι εὐτονῶ τὴν γερδιακὴν τέχνην ποιεῖν διὰ τὸ ἀσθενῆ με εἶναι τῇ ὁράσει καὶ ὑπὸ γήρους συνεχόμενον εἶναι ὡς ἐτῶν π … , διὸ ἀξιῶ σε τὸν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ὄψονταιhoraō will behold G3700 Verb · future · middle deponent · indicative · third person · plural ¶

1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To appear means to come into view or be seen, often unexpectedly. In Acts 1:3, Jesus appeared to his disciples after his resurrection, showing himself to them. It involves being visible or noticeable.

Tyndale gloss

to appear

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὀπτάνομαι (*optanomai*) means to appear or to be seen. It is a middle voice verb derived from the root related to seeing, indicating an active participation in the act of appearing. The New Testament uses this term in Acts 1:3, where it refers to someone allowing themselves to be seen. There is some discussion among lexicographers about its nuances compared to other Greek words for seeing.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† ὀπτάνω,

[in LXX: III Ki 8:8 (ראה ni.), To 12:19*;]

late present as from ὤφθην (= ὁράω); mid., ὀπτάνομαι, to allow oneself to be seen, to appear. c. dat., Ac 1:3. (For exx. from π., v. Deiss., LAE, 79, 2525; MM, ii, xviii.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὀπτάνω (OIITQ): to look at, behold; mid. pres. ptep. ὀπτανόμενος; to allow one’s self to be seen, to appear: tui, Acts i. 3. (1 K. viii. 8; Tob. xii. 19; [Graec. Ven. Ex. χχχῖν. 24].)~ ὀπτασία. -as, ἡ, (ὀπτάζω) ; 1. the act of exhibiting one’s self to view: ὀπτασίαι κυρίου, 2 Co. xii. 1 [A. V. visions; cf. Meyer ad loc.] (ἐν ἡμέραις ὀπτασίας pov, Add. to Esth. iv. 1.44 (13); [οἷς Mal. iii. 2]; ἥλιος ἐν ὀπτασίᾳ, coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sight, a vision, an appearance presented to one whether asleep or awake: οὐράνιος ont. Acts xxvi. 19; ἑωρακέναι ὀπτασίαν, Lk. i. 22; w. gen. of appos. ἀγγέλων, Lk. xxiv. 23. A later form for ὄψις [ef. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for 7879, Dan. [Theodot.] ix. 23; x. 1, 7 sq.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὀπτάνομαι can be definitely removed from the list or so-called “Biblical” words (Grimm-Thayer, p. 695), since to its occurrences in the LXX (3 Kingdoms 88, Tob 1219: cf. P Oxy XIII. p. 4) and the NT (Ac 1°), we can add such early exx. as P Par 4038 (B.c. 164-158) (= Witkowski,” Ῥ- 72) εἰ δὲ δι᾽ ἄλλο τι οὐκ ὀπτάνεταί por, P Tebt I. 24° (B.C. 117) καὶ μηδαμῶς ὀπτανομένων ὑπ... Of a later date we have the great magical papyrus P Par 574903 (¢. A.D. 300) ὁρκίζω oe τὸν ὀπτανθέντα τῴ ᾿Ο(-- ᾿Τ)σραὴλ ἐν στύλῳ φωτινῷ καὶ νεφέλῃ ἡμερινῇ, an interesting reference to Exod 135} (see Deissmann ZAZ p. 252). On the implications involved in the use of ὀπτάνομαι in Ac 1° as denoting actual appearance as distinguished from vision cf. Knowling 567 ad /. ONTO. With the use of this verbal adj. in Lk 24% (cf. Hobart, p. 182f.) we may compare P Giss I. 93° ὀπτοῦ δέλφακος, ‘roast pork,”’ in what appears to be a…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὀπτάνομαι (optanomai) — to appear.

ὀπτάζομαι,

passive, to be seen, [LXX]:—so ὀπτάνομαι,[LXX+5th c.BC+]:—an active ὀπταίνω in [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὀπτάνομαι

optanomai

of the primary (middle voice)

optomai op'-tom-ahee; which is used for it in certain

tenses; and both as alternate of

3708

to gaze (i.e. with wide-open eyes, as at something remarkable; and

thus differing from 991, which denotes simply voluntary observation;

and from 1492, which expresses merely mechanical, passive or casual

vision; while 2300, and still more emphatically its intensive 2334,

signifies an earnest but more continued inspection; and 4648 a

watching from a distance):--appear, look, see, shew self.

see GREEK for 3708

see GREEK for 991

see GREEK for 1492

see GREEK for 2300

see GREEK for 2334

see GREEK for 4648

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὀπτάνομαι

v.

I appear, am seen

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὀπτάνομαι optanomai 1x

to be seen, appear, Acts 1:3*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-FDI-3P — Verb · future · middle deponent · indicative · third person · plural
future middle deponent indicative — an action still to come.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FDI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

22%you will behold

you will behold22% · 12×appeared17% · 9×will behold9% · 5×he appeared9% · 5×they will behold7% · 4×having appeared6% · 3×will they behold6% · 3×other renderings15% · 8×other renderings9% · 5×

54 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceὀπτάνομαι · 1× in the New Testament

Acts

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

רָאָהsee85%H7200 · 6 verses

Counted over the 7 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

πρεσβύτεροιpresbuteros elders G4245 Adjective · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

66× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

An elder is an older person, often a respected leader in the community, like those mentioned in Matthew 15:2 and 1 Timothy 5:1-2.

Amplified meaning

elders, respected leaders

Tyndale gloss

elder: Elder

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πρεσβύτερος (i.e., *presbuteros*) means 'elder' or 'older' and is derived from the comparative form of πρέσβυς (elderly). It refers to someone advanced in age, often used to denote religious leaders or officials in both Jewish and Christian contexts. In the New Testament, it appears frequently, particularly in relation to church leadership, such as in Acts 14:23 and 1 Timothy 5:1.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πρέσβυς, -εως, ὁ, poët. form of πρεσβύτης (q.v.),

[in LXX (= πρεσβευτής, an ambassador): Nu 21:20 (21), al. (מַלְאָךְ), Is 13:8 57:9 (צִיר), I Mac 9:70, al.;]

an old man. Compar., πρεσβύτερος, -α, -ον, [in LXX chiefly for זָקֵן;]

of age, elder: ὁ νἱὸς ὁ π., Lk 15:25; as subst., opp. to νεανίσκοι, Ac 2:17; to νεώτερος, I Ti 5:1, 2; of the religious leaders of the past, Mt 15:2, Mk 7:3, 5, He 11:2 (= οἱ…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πρεσβύτερος, -a, -ov, (compar. of πρέσβυς), [fr. Hom. down ], elder ; used 1. of age; a. where two persons are spoken of, the elder: ὁ vids ὁ mpeoB. (Ael. v. ἢ. 9,42), Lk. xv. 25. b. univ. advanced in life, an elder, a senior: opp. to νεανίσκοι, Acts 11. 17; opp. to νεώτερος, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq., (Gen. xviii. 11 sq.; Sap. vill. 10; Sir. vi. 34 (33); vii. 14; 2 Mace. viii. 30). οἱ πρεσβύrepo, [A.V. the elders], forefathers, Heb. xi. 2; παράδοσις (q-V-) τῶν mpeoB., received from the fathers, Mt. xv. 2; Mk. vii. 3, 5. 2. a term of rank or office; as such borne by, a. among the Jews, a. members of the great council or Sanhedrin (because in early times the rulers of the people, judges, ete., were selected from the elderly men): Mt. xvi. 21; xxvi. 47, 57, 59 Rec.; XXVii. 3, 12, 20,41; xxviii.12; Mk. viii. 31; xi. 27; xiv. 43,53; xv. 1; Lk. ix. 22; xx. 1; xxii. 52; Jn. viii. 9; Acts iv. 5,23; vi.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πρεσβύτερος. (1) For πρεσβύτερος in the literal sense of the “elder ”’ of two, as in Lk 1535, cf. P Oxy VII. τοῦτ (B.c. 22) of an elder brother, and 74. VIII. 1109? (A.D. 160-1) of an elder son. The fem. occurs in BGU II. 6654.2! (i/a.p.) ἡ mpeoBurépa, Predsigke 1428’ AvovBias πρεσβυτέρα Μέστου, and a curious double comparative in P Lond 177} (A.b. 40-1) (=II. p. 169) 4 πρεσβυτερωτέρα Hp ὧν] ἀδελφή. (2) The use of πρεσβύτερος in 1 Tim κ᾽ to denote an “elder,” a ‘‘senior,’’ as opposed to νεώτερος, may be illustrated from P Par 66% 23 (Ptol./Rom.) where πρεσβύτεροι καὶ ἀδύνατοι Kal νεώτεροι are employed as guardians in connexion with the work on canals and dykes: cf. further from the inscrr. Priene 117° (i/B.C.) ἀεί πΊοτε μὲν πρεσBuré[pous τιμῶν ὡς yovet|s, τοὺς δὲ καθήλικας ὡς ἀδελφούς, τοὺς δὲ [νεωτέρους ὡς παῖδας, and Latyschev I. 22°" (iii/a.D.) τοῖς μὲν ἡλικιώταις προσφερόμενος ὡς…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πρεσβύτερος (presbuteros) — elder: Elder.

Related to: πρεσβῠτέριον

or πρεσβῠ-εῖον, τό, council of elders, presbytery, [NT]

II. honour or privilege of an elder, [LXX+2nd c.AD+]

πρεσβύτερος (presbuteros) — elder: old.

Related to: πρεσβῠτέριον

or πρεσβῠ-εῖον, τό, council of elders, presbytery, [NT]

II. honour or privilege of an elder, [LXX+2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πρεσβύτερος

presbuteros

comparative of presbus (elderly); older; as noun, a senior; specially,

an Israelite Sanhedrist (also figuratively, member of the celestial

council) or Christian "presbyter":-- elder(-est), old.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πρεσβύτερος, α, ον

Adj

elder

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πρεσβύτερος presbyteros 66x

elder, senior; older, more advanced in years, Lk. 15:25; Jn. 8:9; Acts 2:17; an elder in respect of age, person advanced in years, 1 Tim. 5:1, 2; pl. spc. ancients, ancestors, fathers, Mt. 15:2; Heb. 11:2; as an appellation of dignity, an elder, local dignitary, Lk. 7:3; an elder, member of the Jewish Sanhedrin, Mt. 16:21; 21:23; 26:3, 47, 57, 59; an elder or presbyter of the Christian church, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adj-NPM-C — Adjective · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NPM-C Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine Degree: Comparative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

87%elders

elders87% · 58×elder9% · 6×other renderings4% · 3×

67 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject42%adverbial36%object17%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 66 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,παράδοσιςan instruction, ἀπό

καίand, even, also, nam

ἀρχιερεύςhigh priest, chiἀπόστολοςan apostle, a meγραμματεύςa scribe, town-c

τέσσαρεςfour

εἴκοσιIndec

αὐτός

πρός

ἐκκλησίαan assembly, congreg

κατά

πρεσβύτεροςelders66×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

λαόςa people, the crἸουδαῖοςJewishἐκκλησίαan assembly, con

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theἀρχιερεύςhigh priest, chiγραμματεύςa scribe, town-c

λέγωI say, speak

ἐγώἀνάθεμαa curse, a curse

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

ἐπίμήτηρa motherἐγώ

πίπτωI fall, fall under

ἐνώπιονbefore the face καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπρεσβύτερος · 66× in the New Testament

Acts Matthew Revelation Mark Luke 1 Timothy 1 Peter 2 John 3 John Hebrews James John

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀρχιερεύςhigh priest, chief priest×γραμματεύςa scribe, town-clerk, man of learning×λαόςa people, the crowd×ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a messenger, an envoy, a delegat×τέσσαρεςfour×εἴκοσιIndec×παράδοσιςan instruction, tradition×τέDisj×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

זָקֵןold70%H2205 · 64 verses

Counted over the 91 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 16c. AD 40

προλαβὼν γὰρ ὁ θεὸς ἅτε θεὸς ὅτι μίμημα καλὸν οὐκ ἄν ποτε γένοιτο δίχα καλοῦ παραδείγματος οὐδέ τι τῶν αἰσθητῶν ἀνυπαίτιον, ὃ μὴ πρὸς ἀρχέτυπον καὶ νοητὴν ἰδέαν ἀπεικονίσθη, βουληθεὶς τὸν ὁρατὸν κόσμον τουτονὶ δημιουργῆσαι προεξετύπου τὸν νοητόν,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.205c. AD 75–95

γίνονται δὲ παῖδες ὑπὸ μὲν τῆς πρεσβυτέρας Μώαβος·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 13.5c. AD 100

καὶ προσήγαγεν Ἐφραὶμ καὶ Μανασσῆ, τὸν Μανασσῆ θέλων ἵνα εὐλογηθῇ, ὅτι πρεσβύτερος ἦν: ὁ γὰρ Ἰωσὴφ προσήγαγεν εἰς τὴν δεξιὰν χεῖρα τοῦ πατρὸς Ἰακώβ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Adl. 7Pathyris105 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νη μέση μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἀδελφοῦ Παοῦτος πρεσβυτέρου Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φαγώνιος Πέρσου ὡς ἐτῶν λε μέσου μελιχρόου ὑποκλαστοῦ μακροπροσώπου εὐθυρίνου ἀσήμου, ἀπὸ

P.Grenf. 2 32Pathyris102 BC

μέρους ἐν τῇ ἀπὸ νότου ταινίᾳ σφραγῖδος ἄρουραν μίαν, ἧς γείτονες νότου γῆ Καλίβιος πρεσβυτέρας, βορρᾶ γῆ Χεσθώτου τοῦ Μελιπαῖτος, ἀπηλιώτου γῆ Ἁρσιήσιος τοῦ Ζμῖνος, λιβὸς περίχωμα, ἢ οἳ

P.Lips. 1 2Pathyris100 BC

Τιτῶς Πατοῦτος Περσίνη ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέση μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῆς πρεσβυτέρου υἱοῦ Ψεννήσιος τοῦ Ἁρσιήσιος Πέρσου τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσου μελάνχρωτος ὑποκλάστου ἀναφαλάντου

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ὑμῶνsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύof you2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἐνυπνίοιςenupnion dreams G1798 Noun · accusative · plural · neuter ¶

1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A dream or vision seen while sleeping, as mentioned in Acts 2:17 where it talks about people having dreams and visions. This word refers to the content of a dream. In the Bible, dreams are often seen as a means of divine communication.

Amplified meaning

visions while sleeping

Tyndale gloss

dream

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐνύπνιον (lemma: enupnion) means 'dream' or 'vision seen in sleep.' It is derived from the roots meaning 'in' and 'sleep.' The New Testament references it in Acts 2:17, where it denotes a supernatural vision. The entries indicate that it is commonly associated with divine messages or insights received during sleep.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐνύπνιον, -ου, τό

(< ὕπνος),

[in LXX chiefly for חֲלוֹם ;]

a dream: pl., Ac 2:17.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐνύπνιον, -ov, τό, (ἐν and ὕπνος, what appears in sleep; fr. Aeschyl. down), a dream (Lat. insomnium), a vision which presents itself to one in sleep: Acts ii. 17, on which pass. see ἐνυπνιάζω. (Sept. for n\n.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐνύπνιον. This common LXX word (cf. Ac 217) may be illustrated by two passages from the Paris Papyri, both belonging to ii/s.c., P Par 44° (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski, p. 82) ἐγὼ yap ἐνύπνια ὁρῶ πονηρά, 47°° (c. B.C. 153) (= Selectéons, p. 23) ἀποπεπτώκαμεν πλανόμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν καὶ πιστεύοντες τὰ ἐνύπνια, ‘‘ we have fallen from hope, being deceived by the gods and trusting in dreams”: cf. the heading of P Leid C (B.c. 163-2) τὸ ἐνύπ[ν]ειον ὃ [et]5ev Tayns. From the inscrr. we may cite Sy// 802% (iii/B.c.) where the lame and the blind became whole—évirrvioy ἰδόντας μόϊνον (ἐνύπνιον = ὄψις), and Preisigke 685 (ii/B.c.) ἐνύπνια κρίνω, Tod θεοῦ πρόσταγμα ἔχων, TUX’ ἀγαθᾶι.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐνύπνιον (enupnion) — dream.

ἐνύπν-ιον, τό,

(ὕπνος) thing seen in sleep, in apposition with ὄνειρος, θεῖός μοι ἐνύπνιον ἦλθεν ὄνειρος a dream from the gods, a vision in sleep, came to me, [Refs 8th c.BC+].; ἐ. παιδός the vision of a boy, [Refs 1st c.BC+] 'to feast with the Barmecide', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare{ἐνύπνιος}

2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+], dream, ὄψις ἐνυπνίου the vision of a dream, [Refs 5th c.BC+] a mere dream, and ὄνειρος a significant, prophetic one; but the distinction is not generally observed, except by Philo.

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐνύπνιον

enupnion

from 1722 and 5258; something seen in sleep, i.e. a dream (vision in a

dream):--dream.

see GREEK for 1722

see GREEK for 5258

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐνύπνιον, ου, τό

n.n.

a dream, vision

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐνύπνιον enypnion 1x

a dream; in NT a supernatural suggestion or impression received during sleep, a sleep-vision, Acts 2:17*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐνύπνιον ἐν-ύπνιον, ου, τό, ne)n-upni os_ou neut ὕπνος a thing seen in sleep, ἐνύπνιον ἦλθεν ὄνειρος a dream or vision in sleep came to me, Od.:—hence as adv., ἐνύπνιον ἑστιᾶσθαι "to feast with the Barmecide," Ar.

simply a dream, Hdt., attic

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The Scripture declares that the influence of the Spirit of God upon the soul extends to its sleeping as well as its waking thoughts. But, in accordance with the principle enunciated by St. Paul in (1 Corinthians 14:15) dreams, in which the understanding is asleep, are placed below the visions of prophecy, in which the understanding plays its part. Under the Christian dispensation, while we read frequently of trances and vision, dreams are never referred to as vehicles of divine revelation. In exact accordance with this principle are the actual records of the dreams sent by God. The greater number of such dreams were granted, for prediction or for warning, to those who were aliens to the Jewish covenant. And where dreams are recorded as means of God’s revelation to his chosen servants, they are almost always referred to the periods…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Visions in sleep

Job 33:15; Da 2:28

- Often by imaginary

Job 20:8; Isa 29:8

- Excess of business frequently leads to

Ec 5:3

- God's will often revealed in

Nu 12:6; Job 33:15

- FALSE PROPHETS

. Pretended to

Jer 23:25-28; 29:8

. Not to be regarded in

De 13:1-3; Jer 27:9

. Condemned for pretending to

Jer 23:32

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) General References to

Nu 12:6; Job 7:14; Ec 5:3,7; Jer 23:28; Joe 2:28

(2) Notable

Ge 28:12; 37:5; 40:5; 41:1; Jud 7:13; 1Ki 3:5; Da 2:1; 4:5

Mt 1:20; 2:12,19,22; 27:19

--SEE Visions, REVELATIONS

(3) Interpretation of

Ge 40:12; 41:25; Da 1:17; 2:28…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%dreams

dreams100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceἐνύπνιον · 1× in the New Testament

Acts

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

חֲלוֹםdream62%H2472 · 28 verses חָלַםbe healthy, strong .their young are healthy31%H2492 · 14 verses

Counted over the 45 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.229c. AD 40

παρὸ καὶ ἀναστάς, παρ’ ᾧ ἦν ἐνύπνια, εὗρεν, ὅτι αἱ κινήσεις ἅπασαι καὶ αἱ διατάσεις τοῦ ἄφρονός εἰσιν ἐνύπνια ἀληθείας ἀμέτοχα — αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ νοῦς ἐνύπνιον εὑρέθη —, ὅτι ἀληθὲς μέν ἐστι δόγμα τὸ πιστεύειν θεῷ, ψεῦδος δὲ τὸ πιστεύειν τοῖς κενοῖς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 10.198c. AD 75–95

δεηθεὶς δὲ παρʼ αὐτοῦ τὴν αἰτίαν μαθεῖν, διʼ ἣν ὁ βασιλεὺς πάντας εἴη προστεταχὼς ἀναιρεθῆναι τοὺς σοφοὺς καὶ Χαλδαίους καὶ μάγους, καὶ μαθὼν τὸ περὶ τὸ ἐνύπνιον καὶ ὅτι κελευσθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦτʼ αὐτῷ δηλοῦν ἐπιλελησμένῳ φήσαντες μὴ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. BC

P.Paris p. 321-322 no. 50Memphis160 BC

ἔτους κβ Φαρμοῦθι ε. τὸ πρῶτον ἐνύπνιον, ὃ εἶδεν Νεκθονβῆς περὶ τῶν διδυμῶν καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ· Ἀπολλώνιον εἶδον, προσπορεύεταί μοι. λέγει·

P. Leiden Gr. 1 no. C Vo [immo Ro col. 1-2] (p. 117-118)Memphis159 BC

r,1 τὸ ἐνύπνιον, ὃ εἶδεν Ταγῆς διδύμη Παχὼν ιζ. οἴετο ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ καταβαίνουσα διὰ τοῦ ἀμφόδου

“And it will be in the last days, says <the> God, I will pour out of the Spirit of Mine upon all flesh and will prophesy the sons of you and the daughters of you, and the young men of you visions will behold and the elders of you dreams will dream.”

ἐνυπνιασθήσονται.enupniazō will dream. G1797 Verb · future · passive · indicative · third person · plural ¶

2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To dream or have a vision while sleeping, like in Acts 2:17 where it quotes Joel about people dreaming and having visions. This word is used to describe the experience of dreaming. In the New Testament, it is often associated with divine revelation.

Amplified meaning

have prophetic, symbolic

Tyndale gloss

to dream

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐνυπνιάζομαι (i.e., *enupniazomai*) means 'to dream.' It is derived from the root related to dreams and is used in the New Testament to describe dreaming under supernatural influence, as seen in Acts 2:17 and Jude 8. The lexicons note its usage in both the middle and passive forms, indicating a range of meanings from ordinary dreaming to visions with divine implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐνυπνιάζω

(< ἐνύπνιον),

[in LXX, as in NT, -ομαι, depon., chiefly for חָלַם ;]

to dream: ἐνυπνίοις ἐ., Ac 2:17 (LXX); pres. ptcp., Ju 8.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐνυπνιάζω (ἐνύπνιον, q. Vv.) : to dream (Aristot. h. an. 4, 10, ete.), and dep. ἐνυπνιάζομαι (Hippocr., Plut. Brut. e. 24); so always in the Bible, for Ὁ ΤΊ, with fut. pass. ἐνυπνιασθήσομαι, and com. with aor. pass. ἐνυπνιάσθην, more rarely mid. ἐνυπνιασάμην (Gen. xxxvii.9; Jude. vii. 13); ἐνύπνια ἐνυπνιάζεσθαι (in Sept. for minion Don), to dream (divinely suggested) dreams: Acts ii. 17 fr. Joel iii. 1 (ii. 28); but the reading ἐνυπνίοις (ἐνυπνιάζεσθαι) was long ago restored, which reading also cod. Alex. gives in Joel. Metaph. to be beguiled with sensual images and carried away to an impious course of conduct: Jude 8.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐνυπνιάζομαι. The importance attached to temple visions and dreams in Egypt (cf. Milligan Selections, p. 18 ff.) is shown by the Text €VUTTVLOV mention in P Par 5478 of an ἐνυπνιοκριτής in the Serapeum : see also s.v. ἐνύπνιον. Boll Offensarung, p. 135 cites Lyd. de ost. p. 76, 21 αἰσίους ὀνείρους of ἄνθρωποι ἐνυπνιασθήσονται, of κακὸν πέρας ἕξουσιν.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐνυπνιάζω (enupniazō) — to dream.

ἐνυπνι-άζω,

dream, [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—in middle and passive with accusative, ἐνυπνιάζεσθαι θορυβώδεα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in future passive -ασθήσομαι[LXX+6th c.AD+]: aorist middle -ασάμην[LXX]passive -άσθην[LXX]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐνυπνιάζομαι

enupniazomai

middle voice from 1798; to dream:--dream(-er).

see GREEK for 1798

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐνυπνιάζομαι

v.

I dream

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐνυπνιάζομαι enypniazomai 2x

to dream, in NT to dream under supernatural impression, Acts 2:17; to dream delusion, have visions, Jude 8*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-FPI-3P — Verb · future · passive · indicative · third person · plural
future passive indicative — an action still to come.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FPI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Dream

God has frequently made use of dreams in communicating his will to men. The most remarkable instances of this are recorded in the history of Jacob (Gen. 28:12; 31:10), Laban (31:24), Joseph (37:9-11), Gideon (Judg. 7), and Solomon (1 Kings 3:5). Other significant dreams are also recorded, such as those of Abimelech (Gen. 20:3-7), Pharaoh’s chief butler and baker (40:5), Pharaoh (41:1-8), the Midianites (Judg. 7:13), Nebuchadnezzar (Dan. 2:1; 4:10, 18), the wise men from the east (Matt. 2:12), and Pilate’s wife (27:19).

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The orientals, and in particular the Jews, greatly regarded dreams, and applied for their interpretation to those who undertook to explain them. We see the antiquity of this custom in the history of Pharaoh’s butler and baker, Ge 40:1-23; and Pharaoh himself and Nebuchadnezzar are also instances. God expressly forbade his people to observe dreams, and to consult explainers of them. He condemned to death all who pretended to have prophetic dreams, even though what they foretold came to pass, if they had any tendency to promote idolatry, De 13:1-3. But they were not forbidden, when they thought they had a significant dream, to address the prophets of the Lord, or the high priest in his ephod, to have it explained. The Lord frequently made known his will in dreams, and enabled…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Evanescent Job 20:8

→ Vanity of Ec 5:3,7

→ INSTANCES OF

Of Abimelech,, concerning Sarah Ge 20:3

Of Jacob, concerning the ladder Ge 28:12

The ring-straked cattle Ge 31:10-13

Concerning his going down into Egypt Ge 46:2

Of Laban, concerning Jacob Ge 31:24

Of Joseph, concerning the sheaves Ge 37:5-10

Of Midianite concerning the cake of barley Jud 7:13

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

50%will dream

will dream50% · 1×dreaming50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ἐνύπνιονa dream, vision

σύ

οὗτος

καίand, even, also,

ἐνυπνιάζομαιwill dream.2×

what comes after →

σάρξflesh, body

μένDisj

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐνυπνιάζομαι · 2× in the New Testament

Acts Jude

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

חָלַםbe healthy, strong .their young are healthy63%H2492 · 7 verses חֲלוֹםdream45%H2472 · 5 verses הִנֵּההִנֶּה־ lo!, behold!36%H2009 · 4 verses אָחbrother36%H251 · 4 verses

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

BSB	‘In the last days, God says, I will pour out My Spirit on all people. Your sons and daughters will prophesy, your young men will see visions, your old men will dream dreams.
KJV	And it shall come to pass in the last days, saith God, I will pour out of my Spirit upon all flesh: and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, and your young men shall see visions, and your old men shall dream dreams:
ASV	And it shall be in the last days, saith God, I will pour forth of my Spirit upon all flesh: And your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, And your young men shall see visions, And your old men shall dream dreams:
YLT	And it shall be in the last days, saith God, I will pour out of My Spirit upon all flesh, and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, and your young men shall see visions, and your old men shall dream dreams;
WEB	‘It will be in the last days, says God, that I will pour out my Spirit on all flesh. Your sons and your daughters will prophesy. Your young men will see visions. Your old men will dream dreams.
BBE	And it will come about, in the last days, says God, that I will send out my Spirit on all flesh; and your sons and your daughters will be prophets, and your young men will see visions, and your old men will have dreams:

Acts 2:17 — Word Study

Cite / Share This Page

Deep Study — Acts 2:17

Context — Peter's Sermon at Pentecostgenerated

Cross References

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 31 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

Nave’s Topical Bible — the subjects this verse is filed under

The Key Word — ἐκχεῶ, ekcheōgenerated

How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

Sentence Structuregenerated

Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Reflection Questionsgenerated

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Modern formal

Tyndale line

Strictly literal

From the Latin

Simplified

Word by word, the decisions they made

The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Word by word, across the editions

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

Lexicons — every word in Acts 2:17

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →